M A R I C H E M - · PDF fileM A R I C H E M ® P R O D U C T S ... MARICHEM PCS Cargo...

M A R I C H E M® P R O D U C T S E L E C T I O N Q U I D E

PROBLEM PRODUCT APPLICATIONS ACTIONS BOILER WATER TREATMENT

Corrosion, scale deposit formation and carry over.

B.W.T. NEW FORMULA B.W.T POWDER

Auxiliary, exhaust gas system boilers with fresh and distilled water make up.

Excessive protection to hardness and sludge concentration. Removal of dissolved oxygen and used as an antifoaming agent.

Corrosion in boilers. ALKALINITY CONTROL Acidic environment conditions neutralization. Alkalinity stabilization

Scale deposit formation. PHOSPHATE Prevention to salt corrosion through hardness control.

Oxygen saturation. OXYCONTROL Dissolved oxygen binding.

Corrosion in feed water and condensate systems. MARICHEM CCI Acidic environment conditions neutralization.

Alkalinity stabilization.

Sludge & oil contamination. BOILER SLUDGE CONDITIONER

All pressure (up to 60 kgs/cm2 - 850psi) boilers

with fresh and distilled water make up.

Prevention to the formation of adhesive compounds. Sludge dispersion until removal.

COOLING WATER TREATMENT

Biological fouling. MARICHEM S Fe Sea water cooling systems. Antifouling treatment to the prevention of marine growth and termination of bacteria associated to sea water.

Corrosion, scale and cavities.

D.C.W.T. NON CHROMATE D.C.W.T POWDER

Diesel engine and general cooling systems.

Prevention to corrosion. Control to deposit formation and sludge. Use against cavity erosion.

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT Scale foaming and carry over. EVAPORATOR TREATMENT Fresh Water Generators of the Flash,

Submerged Tubes and Other Types. Foam and carry-over elimination. Protection against scale forming salts to heat transfer surfaces.

FUEL OIL TREATMENT

Sludge build-up. F.O.T Dispersion of deposits, sludge and dissolution of water emulsions to a homogeneous state for combustion.

Incomplete combustion. F.O.T 10 Fuel quality enrichment while dispersion of sludge into a state of combustion.

Sulfur -Vanadium slag deposits. F.O.T C-100

Fuel Tanks. Combustion Spaces-Diesel,

Steam Boilers. Diesel, Heavy Metals Elimination. Treatment and reduction of corrosive heavy metal

fuel oil ash, through the improvement of combustion. Smoke reduction.

Microorganisms contaminating fuel storage tanks and systems.

FUEL BIOCONTROL Additive to fuel storage tanks and fuel lines where microbes can cause contamination.

Helps in the extermination of microorganisms and bacteria from the fuel oil.

Soot build-up. SOOT CLEANER SOOT CLEANER LIQUID Exhaust System.

Removal of soot and fire scale deposits. Prevention to acid formation eliminating corrosion, decreasing fuel consumption.

TANK CLEANERS

Vegetable and animal oil. ALCACLEAN H.D Removal of vegetable, animal, fish oil and fat. Elimination of bad odours. Removal of petcoke.

Fuel oil and crude oils. TANK CLEANER TANK CLEANER-S

Emulsification of petroleum products residues. Degreasing.

Heavy contamination of non -soluble organic compounds. MARICHEM T.T.C.

Fuel Oil Tanks. Cargo Tanks. Ballast Tanks.

High quality heavy duty degreasing of petroleum products, fats, oils, minerals and fuel sludge.

COATINGS PLASTIC COATING Semi-hard water base coating. STRONG PLASTIC RESISTANT

Ballast Tanks, Fresh Water Tanks. Hard, two component, solvent base coating. Corrosion.

MARICOTE ALOX Ballast Tanks. Soft solvent base coating.


PROBLEM PRODUCT APPLICATIONS ACTIONS MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

Oil deposits. ELECTROCLEAN A ELECTROCLEAN B ELECTROCLEAN SUPER FAST

Electrical equipment and parts. Cleaning and degreasing of electrical equipment at the desired evaporation rate.

Various organic deposits. OIL & GREASE REMOVER HD999

General on-board use. Removal of aromatic mineral oils, grease, fats, soot, asphalt and light carbon stains.

Scale and corrosion. DESCALER LIQUID 555 DESCALER POWDER

Boiler, steam generator, evaporator. Removal of rust and heavy deposits of water scale.

Petroleum sludge deposits PURIFIER DISC CLEANER Purifier, separator discs. Removal of carbonaceous varnish deposits where lube and fuel accumulates.

Oil & organic deposits AIR COOLER CLEANER AIR COOLER CLEANER L.T.

Diesel engine air side coolers, turbo-chargers, intercooler filters. Removal of oils, greases, carbon deposits and soot.

Carbon deposits CARBON REMOVER Engine pistons, rings, valves, parts exposed to combustion.

Removal of deposits containing carbon, resins or varnishes.

Rust corrosion RUST REMOVER RUST SHIELD - PHOS

Bulkheads, decks railings and other structural surfaces.

Removal and control of rust. Prevention to further corrosion.

Weld slag, grinding dust, annealing scale. Aluminium cleaning.

PICKLING LIQUID PICKLING PASTE PASSIVATION LIQUID

Tanks, pickling installations, stainless steel.

Removal of weld slag, grinding dust, annealing scale that prevent the passivation of stainless steel.

Lime LIME CLEANER Cargo holds Removal of Lime deposits.

Heavy grease, sludge, fatty oil, fish oil, animal and vegetable oil

MARICLEAN DG-25 Engine rooms, decks, cargo holds and as a tank cleaner.

Cleaning and elimination of grease, oil, sludge and grime. Applicable to plastic, rubber and epoxy compounds.

Various organic deposits., hydrocarbon gas-freeing, deodorizing, general everyday cleaning.

GENERAL CLEANING & SOLVENT ALCACTIVE LIQUID

Deck, cargo holds, general use. Heavy duty, general-purpose cleaners for the removal of oils, fats and acids. Odour elimination. Applicable to “gas-free” effect.

Oil & organic deposits. BILGE CLEANER Bilges. Emulsification of oils, fats and grease. Removal of general organic deposits.

Mud, Heavy Inorganic Deposits. MUD CONDITIONER Ballast Tanks. Mud dispersion allowing removal through blowdown.

Oil Spill dispersion with environmental concern.

MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT

At sea or on-board oil pollution where a 3rd generation type II and III quality

protection is needed.

Converts oil spills to emulsions that are easily biodegradable.

Oil spills. OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER At sea and onboard oil pollution. Cleaning of oil spills. Efficient dispersant of mineral oils, crude oils, fuel oils, lubricants etc.

Traces of Lead, Aromatic Hydrocarbon, Chloride and Sulfide Compounds deposits.

BUFFERSOL Cargo Tanks and Metal Articles.

Removal of Lead, Aromatic Hydrocarbon, Chloride and Sulfide deposits from zinc-silicate coated tank surfaces. Neutralization of strong acid and alkaline compounds.

Sewage clogging. SANITATION A-CLEANER CHLORIDE TABLETS

Sinks, toilets, showers, Sewage Tanks, Sewage lines etc.

Removal-cleaning of sewage system form oils, fats and other organic compounds.

Cement Deposits. CEMENT REMOVER Dry Cargo Holds and Decks. Removal of cement deposits and/or dry cement stains.

Oil, grease, fuel, sludge and light carbon deposits FILTER CLEANER Metal and Ceramic Oil Filters. Efficient removal/cleaning of clogged oil and fuel

filters. Dirt, grease, mineral oils, fats and wax accumulates LIQUID SOAP General Use. Cleaning and elimination of animal, vegetable oils,

fats, waxes, bad odors. Appropriate for Gas-Freeing. Dirt, grease, fuel, oil HAND CLEANER Hand Cleaning. Powerful and safe cleaning paste for engineers.

Pet coke and coal deposits. MARICHEM PCS Cargo Holds/Storage Tanks. Removal of pet coke, coal and mineral deposits. Elimination of bad odors. Neutralization of acidic conditions.

Old paints, varnishes and enamels. PAINT REMOVER Metal and other surfaces and parts.

Attacks, penetrates and removes paint, varnishes and enamels from metal surfaces, epoxy and zinc silicate coatings.

Grease, oil, carbon and other petroleum deposits. SOLBREAK Cargo Tanks, Deep Tanks, Bilges,

Engine Rooms, etc.

Removes oil, grease, light carbon deposits-petroleum accumulates etc. Breaks the waste water emulsions into two phases, an organic and an aqueous.

To improve the penetration of water- based cleaners.

FOAM PLUS Additive to all water based cleaners for animal & vegetable oil removal,

petcoke cleaning etc.

Prolongs and reinforces the action of tank cleaners, degreasers.


PROBLEM PRODUCT APPLICATIONS ACTIONS CHEMICAL EQUIPMENT

Alkalinity of Water Samples. ALKALINITY TEST KIT Boiler Water Treatment. Effectively count the calcium carbonate salt content in boiler water systems so that appropriate treatment is applied.

Chlorides Concentration in Water Samples. CHLORIDE TEST KIT Boiler Water Treatment.

Effectively count the chlorides concentration in boiler water systems so that to account for the quality of the water.

Dosing of chemical products. DOSING SYSTEM To use with treatment products In order to accomplish controlled flow.

Efficiently to dose the prescribed quantity of treatment chemicals where necessary, at a controlled flow rate.

Application of chemicals, water ,sand being under pressure.

HIGH PRESSURE MACHINES General Use. Application of chemical cleaning solutions under pressure. Effective hydro-sand blasting applications where necessary.

Alkalinity in engine oil samples. MARICHEM TBN TEST KIT Engine Oils. Efficiently to test the alkalinity value in all engine oils.

Water in oil samples. MARICHEM WIO TEST KIT Engine Oils, Gear Oils, Hydraulic Oils, etc. Effectively to test the content of water contaminant in oils.

Nitrites concentration in water samples. NITRITE TEST KIT Cooling Water Treatment.

To count the nitrites concentration on a periodic basis so as to ensure maximum conditions in cooling water engine system.

Oil spills. OIL CLEAN KIT Oil Spills. Effectively to clean oil spills on board, at sea and at shore with the equipment as specified by OPA 90 regulation.

Oil Spills. OIL SPILL ABSORBENTS OIL BOOMS

Oil Spills. Effectively cleans oil spills on-board, at sea and at shore.

Phosphate ions count in water samples. PHOSPHATE TEST KIT Boiler Water Treatment. Effectively to count the concentration in of phosphate

ions in boiler water samples.

Hydrogen ions concentration in water samples. pH MEASURING TAPE Water.

To measure the pH value of fresh water samples in all water systems so as to evaluate the quality of the water.

Sulfite ions concentration in water samples. SULFITE TEST KIT Boiler Water Treatment. To detect the sodium sulfite concentration in water

samples for all boiler water systems under treatment.

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 7

SECTION A : WATER TREATMENT

PART I : BOILER WATER TREATMENT

ALKALINITY CONTROL ......................................................................................... 13BOILER SLUDGE CONDITIONER ......................................................................... 15B.W.T. NEW FORMULA .......................................................................................... 17B.W.T. POWDER ..................................................................................................... 19MARICHEM C.C.I. ................................................................................................... 21OXYCONTROL ....................................................................................................... 23PHOSPHATE .......................................................................................................... 25

PART II : COOLING WATER TREATMENT

D.C.W.T. NON CHROMATE ................................................................................... 29D.C.W.T. POWDER ................................................................................................. 31MARICHEM S-Fe .................................................................................................... 33

PART III : EVAPORATOR TREATMENT

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT (MARIVAP) .............................................................. 37

SECTION B : FUEL TREATMENT

F.O.T. ..................................................................................................................... 39F.O.T. 10 ................................................................................................................. 41F.O.T. C-100 ........................................................................................................... 43FUEL BIOCONTROL .............................................................................................. 45SOOT CLEANER .................................................................................................... 47SOOT CLEANER LIQUID ....................................................................................... 49

SECTION C : MAINTENANCE

PART I : TANK CLEANERS

ALCACLEAN H.D. .................................................................................................. 53CEMENT REMOVER .............................................................................................. 55LIME CLEANER ..................................................................................................... 57MARICHEM P.C.S. ................................................................................................. 59MARICHEM T.T.C. ................................................................................................. 61TANK CLEANER ................................................................................................... 63TANK CLEANER S ................................................................................................. 65

PART II : MAINTENANCE

AIR COOLER CLEANER ........................................................................................ 71AIR COOLER CLEANER L.T. ................................................................................. 73ALCACTIVE LIQUID ............................................................................................... 75BIOACTIVE POWDER ............................................................................................ 77BUFFERSOL .......................................................................................................... 79CARBON REMOVER ............................................................................................. 81CHLORIDE TABLETS ............................................................................................ 83DESCALER LIQUID 555 ......................................................................................... 85DESCALER POWDER .......................................................................................... 87ELECTROCLEAN A QUICK DRY ........................................................................... 89ELECTROCLEAN B ............................................................................................... 91ELECTROCLEAN SUPERFAST ............................................................................. 93

MARICHEM®

MARINE CHEMICALS AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION

T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S

FILTER CLEANER .................................................................................................. 95FOAM PLUS ........................................................................................................... 97GENERAL CLEANING AND SOLVENT .................................................................. 99HAND CLEANER .................................................................................................. 101LIQUID SOAP ....................................................................................................... 103MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT .................................................................. 105MARICLEAN DG-25 ............................................................................................. 109MUD CONDITIONER ........................................................................................... 111OIL AND GREASE REMOVER HD 999 ................................................................ 113OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER ....................................................................................... 115PASSIVATION LIQUID ......................................................................................... 119PICKLING LIQUID ................................................................................................ 121PICKLING PASTE ................................................................................................ 123PURIFIER DISC CLEANER .................................................................................. 125RUST REMOVER ................................................................................................ 127RUST SHIELD PHOS ........................................................................................... 129SANITATION A-CLEANER ................................................................................... 131SOLBREAK .......................................................................................................... 133

SECTION D : COATINGS

MARICOTE ALOX ................................................................................................ 135PLASTIC COATING .............................................................................................. 137STRONG PLASTIC RESISTANT .......................................................................... 147

SECTION E : CHEMICAL EQUIPMENTHIGH PRESSURE MACHINESANTI-POLLUTIONS KITS

PART I : TEST KITS

BOILER WATER TREATMENT TEST KITSALKALINITY TEST KIT .......................................................................................... 151 WT ALKA TEST KIT .............................................................................................. 153CHLORIDE TEST KIT ........................................................................................... 155WT CHLORI TEST KIT .......................................................................................... 157PHOSPHATE TEST KIT ....................................................................................... 159WT PHOSP TEST KIT ........................................................................................... 161SULFITE TEST KIT ............................................................................................... 163WT SULFI TEST KIT ............................................................................................. 165D.C.W.T. TEST KITSCHLORIDE TEST KIT ........................................................................................... 169WT CHLORI TEST KIT .......................................................................................... 171NITRITE TEST KIT ................................................................................................. 173FUEL OIL - LUBE OIL TEST KITSMARICHEM T.B.N. TEST KIT ............................................................................... 177MARICHEM WATER IN OIL TEST KIT ................................................................. 179EQUIPMENTDOSING SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 183pH MEASURING TAPE ........................................................................................ 185

PART II : HIGH PRESSURE MACHINES

HIGH PRESSURE MACHINES ............................................................................ 189

PART III : ANTI-POLLUTION KITS & EQUIPMENT

OIL CLEAN KIT ..................................................................................................... 195OIL BOOMS ......................................................................................................... 199OIL SPILL ABSORBENTS .................................................................................... 201

DELIVERED ON A PLATE AS AND WHEN REQUIRED

MARICHEM MARIGASES WorldwideServices is totally committed to meeting theever-growing needs of the maritime business andespecially of the international fleet.

Whether it is meeting the constantly risingexpectations in quality, efficiency and flexibilityor satisfying the demands placed by strict sea-worthiness, our group is up to the challenge.

MARICHEM MARIGASES believes in abso-lute customer services. For that purpose, we pur-sue customer satisfaction and recognition atevery stage of contact. We understand thatresponsibility does not end with delivery.

Service after sale is a priority with us. Long rec-ognized for the technical excellence of our prod-ucts we have made a worldwide commitment tomatch their performance with after sale support.

The staff in our laboratories put exceptionalefforts to offer customers the best possible ser-vice. Consequently, we ensure that our cus-tomers will receive the combination of superiorproducts and efficient services.

Our specialists in trade, research and develop-ment, production, risk management, supply anddistribution are always available to tailor our ser-vices to the customers' needs.

w w w . m a r i c h e m - m a r i g a s e s . c o m

Chemicals Division: Innovation and Quality

Over the years, our experience and knowledgehas fully satisfied our customers around theworld, round the clock, while research anddevelopment of new products is accomplished inorder to meet the norms and standards of theinternational community.

Our aim is to surpass the specified regulationsand to advance to the next generation of innova-tive products linked to new chemical technologyfeatures, new application needs combined withmaximum environmental safety.

MARICHEM MARIGASES has an internation-al network of chemical specialists and technicalengineers to support your vessels whenever re-quired.

A brief list of our chemicals division categoriesis given below. The wide range of products issuited to meet your every need worldwide.

>Boiler Water Treatment>Cooling Water Treatment>Evaporator Treatment>Fuel Oil Treatment>Tank Cleaners>Maintenance Products>Coatings>Chemical Equipment>Dosing Systems>High Pressure Cleaning Machinery>Boiler and Cooling Water Test Kits>Oil Test Kits>Pollution Control Equipment

Gases and Refrigerants: To Serve and to Maintain

MARICHEM MARIGASES Gases Division isconsidered to be one of the leading suppliers inmarine gases, refrigerants, welding and cuttingequipment.

Our high standards, attention to quality and spec-ifications provide Safety and Reliability underthe most demanding conditions.

To support the international fleet requirements,MARICHEM MARIGASES offers a completerange of Maintenance and Repair Equipment in-cluding the following:

>Gases and gas mixtures>Gas welding machinery>Refrigerants>Refrigerant Recovery Units>Accessories for electric arc welding> Arc welding electrodes>Central distribution systems

(including gas stations)>Gas welding and cutting equipment >Gas welding and brazing consumables

The Gases Division team of people comprises ofresponsible, highly trained engineers and workforce individuals whose experience and dedica-tion ensure complete customer satisfaction.

Fire, Rescue and Safety: To Feel Safe is to Be Safe

MARICHEM MARIGASES Worldwide Servicesprovides the most professional service through awell-established network, in order to assist modernshipping meet today's demanding standards.

The international regulations governing safety at seaget tougher every year, with the strict InternationalSafety Management (ISM) Code, operators and shipmanagers are becoming even more alert to the ful-fillment of all requirements for safety equipment.

MARICHEM MARIGASES offers a complete tai-lor made to the customer needs package uponrequest. This is a reliable and cost effective way toassure that on-board safety standards meet theincreasingly tough regulations for safety at sea.

>Firefighting Equipment>Fixed Fire Extinguishing & Detection>Rescue and Life Saving Equipment>Safety Equipment>Systems & Service

MARICHEM MARIGASES Worldwide Services Fire, Rescue and Safety Division ensures:

Global availability for annual inspections by Classification approved safety Inspectors at the mostcompetitive prices in the market.Free of charge contact follow-up of the customer's entire fleet certificates while recommending themost appropriate and cost effective port of service.

Information Technology: Our Way to the Future

MARICHEM MARIGASES Worldwide Services has im-plemented web-based systems to increase efficiency ofbuying products and services.

Throughout the years our aim has remained the same,that is, to assist customers operate their business in themost cost-effective method.

For this purpose we have adopted, global IT systemswhich will give our customers the opportunity to placeorders, make inquiries and acquire statistical data.

MARICHEM®

BOILER WATER TREATMENT

P A R T I

13MARICHEM®

MARICHEM MARIGASESW O R L D W I D E S E R V I C E S

®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

ALKALINITY CONTROL is a concentratedalkaline solution recommended for boiler watertreatment. It prevents corrosion and assists inconverting the hard scale deposits to a soft andnon-sticking mud. Furthermore, it is used as aneutralizing product against other acidic in na-ture cleaning products.

ADVANTAGES AND CHARACTERISTICS

- Efficient in the prevention of corrosion.- Ideal for salt-scale control.- Can be combined with other products.- Easy to apply and use.- Achieves optimum results regarding natural

oils and fats.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

ALKALINITY CONTROL is a SodiumHydroxide solution exceptionally alkaline. Thisinorganic, non-volatile alkali attacks Alu-minum, Zinc, Magnesium and Tin. There is noknown effect on rubber and plastic.When dissolved, with any proportion of water,heat may be released.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 1.25/15°CpH : 14Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container673001 30 Plastic jerrican

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Dosage is proportional to p-Alkalinity and/orpH. A proper level of treatment is maintainedby testing for p-Alkalinity. For instance, a100ml portion of ALKALINITY CONTROL inone ton of water raises alkalinity by 50-60 ppmas CaCO3. Initially, use 150ml of ALKALINI-TY CONTROL per ton of water. Note that high-pressure boilers and water boilers should sus-tain a 100 -150 ppm as CaCO3 concentration.

B. Testing Procedure

1. Test water sample from the water boiler asdescribed in the directions of MARICHEMALKALINITY TEST KIT or WT ALKA TESTKIT.2. Determine the present alkalinity value ex-pressed as ppm CaCO3.3. Consult the test result table, as shown in theMARICHEM ALKALINITY TEST KIT or WTALKA TEST KIT manual, this will advise ondosage per ton needed, to reach the desiredlevel of 100-150 ppm as CaCO3.4. A control test for the alkalinity of the watershould be conducted after 3-6 hours from theapplication.

C. Feeding Procedure

Low-Pressure Boilers (up to 28 bars)Dissolve the desired volume of ALKALINITYCONTROL into 5 litres of feed-water, whichshould then be passed through the recalculatingor the main feed pipe into the stream or the hotwell tank.

High-Pressure Boilers (28 to 60 bars)Dissolve the desired volume of ALKALINITYCONTROL into 5 litres of feed-water, whichthen should be passed to the stream or waterdrum through the chemical pump.


ALKALINITY CONTROL™

14


SAFETY AND HANDLING

Read the Material Safety Data Sheet before using this product.

For detailed information on safety and health, please refer to Material Safety Data Sheet and/or Product Label.

MARICHEM MARIGASES Worldwide Services or any subsidiary or associated companies warranties of merchantabil-ity and competence, if any, along with any expressed warranties concerning this merchandise, shall not be actionable orpertinent or effective if the good is used contrarily or differently to the directions herein and in no other way due toimpending hazards from inappropriate use of the good explained herein. Merchandise might vary insubstantially depend-ing on country of origin. The information provided concerning merchandise is exclusively presented to the customer.

15MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

BOILER SLUDGE CONDITIONER is a prod-uct to be used in situations where the boiler wa-ter is contaminated with oil.This high performance product is applicable toboth medium and low-pressure steam boilers inorder to prevent sludge deposits.


- Drives to the coagulation of the oil dropletsand their removal by blow-down.

- May be combined with other boiler watertreatment products.

- Efficiently prevents the deposition of sludge.- Easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

BOILER SLUDGE CONDITIONER is a whitehigh molecular weight solution. It is hy-drophilic and of low causticity.Appearance / Color : White, viscous liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CpH : 8Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Regularly, a volume of 100 ml of the BOILERSLUDGE CONDITIONER should be appliedfor every ton of water capacity, where oil con-tamination exists.However, in systems where severe oil contami-nation exists, off-line cleaning is requiredbefore the product can be applied.Thereafter, the application should be repeateddaily, for a period of two weeks, until oil re-moval is complete.B. Feeding Procedure

Feed directly to the boiler by using a bypass potfeeder or a suitable chemical injection pump. For low-pressure boilers the solution may beapplied to the hot well or the condensate returntank.Note that BOILER SLUDGE CONDITIONERcan be applied as it is or dissolved with otherboiler treatment products.


BOILER SLUDGE CONDITIONER™

16


SAFETY AND HANDLING



MARICHEM MARIGASES Worldwide Services or any subsidiary or associated companies warranties of merchantabil-ity and competence, if any, along with any expressed warranties concerning this merchandise, shall not be actionable orpertinent or effective if the good is used contrarily or differently to the directions herein and in no other way due to im-pending hazards from inappropriate use of the good explained herein. Merchandise might vary insubstantially depend-ing on country of origin. The information provided concerning merchandise is exclusively presented to the customer.

DESCRIPTION

B.W.T. NEW FORMULA is an innovativeproduct applied to all types of boiler systemsfor water treatment. It provides excess protec-tion from the hard salts, sludge concentrationand corrosion, whilst also removing dissolvedoxygen (even at high and low temperatures).Furthermore, it acts as an antifoam agent.


- One product does it all: a multi-functionalcompleted treatment.

- Prevents salt corrosion through hardness con-trol.

- Acts as an oxygen scavenger in boiler wateras well as a corrosion inhibitor.

- Raises the pH level.- Acts as an antifoam agent.- Submerges suspended solids thus assisting to

easy and sufficient blowdown.- Efficiently protects boiler surfaces.- Cost effective, easy to handle and apply.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

B.W.T. NEW FORMULA is a liquid solution ofalkaline compounds, oxygen binders, corrosioninhibitors, sludge conditioners and antifoamagents.

Appearance / Color : White liquidSpecific gravity : 1.15-1.20/15°CpH : 13.0-13.5Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Initially, use 1 litre of B.W.T. NEW FORMU-LA per ton of water. Thereafter, a volume of 50-60 ml per ton of water should be used daily.For optimum results, consult the MARICHEMShip's Chemical Log Book for boiler watertreatment on a daily basis.Note that the boiler water sample analyses mustbe conducted daily by using the MARICHEMALKALINITY or WT ALKA, PHOSPHATEor WT PHOSP and SULFITE or WT SULFITEST KITS.

B. Feeding Procedure

Once the dosing quantity is determined, B.W.T.NEW FORMULA must be introduced to theboiler's water, continuously, by a meteringpump or by a more conventional method suchas metallic container, plastic pail, etc.

17MARICHEM®


®MMMM BOILER WATER TREATMENT

B.W.T. NEW FORMULA™

18

SAFETY AND HANDLING





DESCRIPTION

B.W.T. POWDER is the equivalent powderproduct of B.W.T. NEW FORMULA.It is applied to all types of boiler water systems,providing excess protection from the hard salts,sludge concentration and corrosion. Moreover,this competent product removes dissolved oxy-gen and acts as an antifoaming agent.


- One product does it all: a multi-functionalcompleted treatment.

- Prevents salt corrosion through hardness con-trol.

- Acts as an oxygen scavenger in boiler water.- Raises the pH level.- Acts as a corrosion inhibitor. - Acts as an antifoaming agent.- Submerges suspended solids thus assisting to

easy and sufficient blow down.- Efficiently protects boiler surfaces.- Cost effective, easy to handle and apply.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

B.W.T. POWDER is a dry powder product con-sisting of alkaline compounds, oxygen binder,corrosion inhibitors, sludge conditioners andantifoam agents.

Appearance / Color : White, dry powderSpecific gravity : 1.1-1.2/15°CpH (1% solution) : 12.5-13.0 Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in kgrs) Container675003 50 Plastic drum

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Initially, use 200 gr of B.W.T. POWDER perton of water. Thereafter, a regulated portion of aconcentrated solution must be introduced dailyor at least every 2 days.For optimum results, consult the MARICHEMShip's Chemical Log Book for boiler watertreatment on a daily basis. Always rememberthat the desired quantity of B.W.T. POWDERshould be dissolved in 1:10 proportion with hotwater before applying to the well hot tank.Note that the boiler water sample analyses mustbe conducted daily by using the MARICHEMALKALINITY or WT ALKA, PHOSPHATEor WT PHOSP and SULFITE or WT SULFITEST KITS.B. Feeding Procedure

Once the desired quantity of B.W.T. POWDERis determined, dissolve the powder as describedabove and feed the solution to the boiler's waterthrough the well hot tank by means of a meter-ing pump or a more conventional method, suchas a metallic container, plastic pail, etc.

19MARICHEM®



B.W.T. POWDER™

20


SAFETY AND HANDLING




DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM C.C.I. is an alkaline liquid com-pound of high standards and quality, designedto act as a condensate corrosion inhibitor in thecondensation return lines of the boiler.


- Neutralizes acidic conditions throughout thecondensate in feed water systems and steamtransfer.

- Controls water pH in the range of 8.0-9.0.- It is boiled off with water into the steam pipes

and due to its alkali character protects directlyfrom surface corrosion.

- Very stable and cannot be absorbed by water. - Can be combined with a range of other prod-

ucts.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MARICHEM C.C.I. is a concentrated, volatilealkaline solution that controls corrosion by neu-tralizing contaminants, such as carbonic acidwhich is formed by dissolved carbon dioxide inevaporating water.

Appearance / Color : Straw, colorless liquidOdor : Ammonia-likeSpecific gravity : 1.03-1.04/15°CpH : 11Solubility : Appreciable

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

MARICHEM C.C.I. must be applied daily at anindicated volume of 100 ml per 1 ton of boilerwater per day.Note that per day dosing is a must in order tokeep the pH level under control.

B. Feeding Procedure

MARICHEM C.C.I. must be fed, by means of ametering pump, in the boiler at any of the fol-lowing points:- Condensation pump discharge.- Deaerator storage tank.- Hot well tank.- Condensation return tank.

21MARICHEM®



MARICHEM C.C.I.™

22


SAFETY AND HANDLING




23MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

OXYCONTROL is a liquid catalyst compoundwhich reacts instantly with dissolved oxygen inwater thus protecting the boiler from oxygencorrosion. The highly efficient results achieved,are based on its reaction time and its ability tobind, to absorb and to counteract the dissolvedoxygen, even at low temperatures. Additionally,OXYCONTROL is applicable to all steam gen-erating and water systems, when the neutraliz-ing of dissolved carbon dioxide is required.


- Protects against oxygen corrosion and can beused at low temperatures.

- Very efficient and rapid oxygen scavenger.- Can be used in combination with a number of

other treatment products. - Safe to use on any steam generators and steam

boilers experiencing dissolved oxygen satura-tion.

- Cost effective, easy to handle and apply.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

OXYCONTROL is a concentrated liquid sul-fite compound with a specialized catalyst foroxygen binding.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidOdor : OdorlessSpecific gravity : 1.1/15°CpH : 10PACKAGING


OXYCONTROL TESTING CHART

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Initially, a volume of 1.2 litres per ton of theboiler's water must be used for a period of 48hours. Thereafter, a dose of 300 ml per ton ofwater is sufficient to use on a daily basis.However, dosage may be increased or de-creased based on test results.B. Sampling and Testing

To achieve optimal results, it is important to ad-just the treated water and maintain boiler condi-tions by testing water samples on a daily basisor at the very least, every three days with theMARICHEM SULFITE or WT SULFI TESTKIT, depending on the adjustment period tomaintain stable sulfite concentrations in theboiler's water.The water samples must always be taken fromthe same origin found in the middle of the boil-er after blow down has occurred. Keep in mindthat before testing, the water samples must beleft to cool at room temperature. Thereafter, theresults may be evaluated according to the OXY-CONTROL TESTING CHART found below.C. Feeding Procedure

OXYCONTROL must be fed into the boiler'sfeed pump suction line or into the hot well tank,continuously, by means of a metering pump.Other conventional ways may also be used.However, direct feeding to the boiler is strong-ly not recommended.


OXYCONTROL™

24


SAFETY AND HANDLING




DESCRIPTION

PHOSPHATE is a highly soluble, powder com-pound significantly effective for the reductionof hardness and scale control in all types ofboilers. The specific purpose is to remove allcalcium hard salts by blow down to a non-con-sistent soft sludge, whilst maintaining a naturallevel of phosphate concentration in the boiler'swater. This way proper hardness regulation isassured.


- Highly soluble, unlike ordinary sodium phos-phates that experience a low solubility at hightemperatures.

- Maintains a regular phosphate balance, result-ing in efficient hardness control.

- Removes calcium hardness by blow down. - Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

PHOSPHATE is a dry powder product, whichcontains a selected sodium phosphate deriva-tive especially formulated to provide efficienthardness control.Appearance/Color : White, thin granulated

powderPhosphate content : Approximately 95%pH (10% Aqueous Solution) : 8-9

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Initially, for an average boiler of 10 ton watercapacity, a quantity of 350-650 grs must beused. It is important to note that no more than100-250 grs of PHOSPHATE will ever berequired on a daily basis, especially when theboiler operates with distilled water make-up.B. Sampling and Testing

Water samples must be drawn and tested peri-odically, using the MARICHEM PHOSPHATETEST KIT or WT PHOSP TEST KIT. To deter-mine if use of PHOSPHATE is required, pleaseconsult evaluation chart and dosing procedurebelow.Each sample should be taken every 24 hoursfrom the special sampling valve.If this is not possible, the samples should betaken from a point which can provide a repre-sentative sample of the entire system. Keep inmind, that this same point must be used for theregular testing, thereafter.C. Feeding Procedure

Once the quantity of PHOSPHATE necessary toapply has been determined, the engineer mustdissolve it in hot water at a ratio of 1/20 (1 partof phosphate to 20 parts of water). Afterwards, feed to the boiler via a by-passfeeder or a chemical pressure feed pump.In the situation where several boilers areinvolved, separate feed lines must be installedfor each one in order to ensure that every boilerreceives the right quantity for treatment.

25MARICHEM®



PHOSPHATE™

26

SAFETY AND HANDLING


TEST RESULTS EVALUATION CHART

NOTEFor sample results less than 20 ppm phosphateconcentration, supply the system with the pre-scribed dosage as in the chart above.For sample results greater than 40 ppm phos-phate concentration, perform blowdown andsupply with the initial dosage prescribed below. INITIAL DOSAGE

PHOSPHATE : 350-650 grs/10 tons of freshwater.

Results 0-10 ppm 10-20 ppm 20-40 ppm Over 40 ppm

Quantity of PHOSPHATE to be added

30 g/ton of water 15 g/ton of water Satisfactory Blowdown




MARICHEM®


P A R T I I

29MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

DIESEL COOLING WATER TREATMENTNON-CHROMATE is a concentrated, low tox-icity, liquid product used as a corrosioninhibitor and scale controller for the treatmentof cooling water in all diesel engines, as well asfor any other cooling and heating water system,contaminated with deposits and corrosionwhich require chemical cleaning.


- Prevents corrosion and scale formation.- A Chromate-free product.- It is not an oil compound and does not create

foaming. - Protects various metal surfaces and is com-

patible with non-metals.- Has a low degree of toxicity.- Prevents scale overheating and maintains reg-

ular heat transfer.- Has no effect on rubber and plastic com-

pounds, hoses.- Compatible with glycol-based antifreeze and

sealing products.- Cost effective, easy to handle and apply.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

D.C.W.T.-N.C. is a Non-Chromate Nitrite liq-uid compound with a deposit modifier, pH sta-bilized. Appearance / Color : Clear, light yellow liquidSpecific gravity : 1.07/15°CpH : 8.5-10Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Initially, a volume proportion of 15 litres ofD.C.W.T.-N.C. per ton of distilled or freshwater must be used.However, appropriate dosing can and must bedetermined, after the testing of water samples,using the MARICHEM NITRITE TEST KIT.For optimum results, a nitrite concentration of20 to 60 ppm in the cooling system is recom-mended.B. Feeding Procedure

After the volume of D.C.W.T. - N.C. is deter-mined, feed the solution into the expansion tankor through a metering pump, these are responsi-ble for the circulation of the solution into thecooling water system. Moreover, the engineerhas to make sure that a proper distribution ofthe solution is accomplished and that a protec-tive film is created. Only then is the treatmentcomplete. After the application and while the coolingwater system is in operation, let the solution cir-culate for approximately 2 hours. Then, test theNitrite concentration in the water using theMARICHEM NITRITE TEST KIT. Repeat thetesting procedure and make up with D.C.W.T. -N.C. solution in order to stabilize the Nitriteconcentration in the water due to losses/leakageof the system.

APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS

D.C.W.T. N.C. is approved by the followingEngine manufacturers:WARTSILA NSDALSTOM ENGINES


D.C.W.T. NON CHROMATE™

30


SAFETY AND HANDLING




31MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

DIESEL COOLING WATER TREATMENTPOWDER is the equivalent powder product ofD.C.W.T. - N.C.. Specifically, it has been de-signed to apply to all marine diesel engines forthe treatment of the cooling water. Furthermore,it can be applied to other cooling and heatingclosed re-circulating water systems in order toprevent rust and scale development.


- Prevents corrosion and scale formation.- Prevents acid attack.- A Chromate-free product.- It is not an oil compound and does not create

foaming. - Protects various metal surfaces and is com-

patible with non-metals.- Has a very low degree of toxicity.- Prevents scale overheating and maintains reg-

ular heat transfer.- Compatible with glycol-based antifreeze and

sealing products.- Cost effective, easy to handle and apply.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

D.C.W.T. Powder is a Non-Chromate Nitritepowder compound with a deposit modifier, pHstabilized. Appearance / Color : Light yellow, thickcrystalline granulated powderSpecific gravity : 1.1/15°CpH (1% solution) : 8.5-10Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Initially, a quantity of 8 kgrs per ton of distilledor fresh water must be used.However, correct dosing can and must be deter-mined, after the testing of water samples, usingthe MARICHEM NITRITE TEST KIT.For optimum results, a nitrite concentration of20 to 60 ppm in the cooling system is recom-mended.B. Feeding Procedure

After the quantity of D.C.W.T. POWDER isdetermined and before the introduction of theproduct into the system, it must be dissolved insufficient volume of water until the dissolutionof the powder is complete.Thereafter, feed the solution into the expansiontank or through a metering pump, these areresponsible for the circulation of the solutioninto the cooling water system.Moreover, the engineer has to make sure that aproper distribution of the solution is accom-plished and that a protective film is created.Only then the treatment is complete. After the application and while the coolingwater system is in operation, let the solutioncirculate for approximately 2 hours. Then, testthe Nitrite concentration in the water using theMARICHEM NITRITE TEST KIT. Repeat thetesting procedure and make up with D.C.W.T.POWDER solution in order to stabilize theNitrite concentration in the water due tolosses/leakage of the system.

APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS

D.C.W.T. POWDER is approved by the follow-ing Engine manufacturers:WARTSILA NSDALSTOM ENGINES


D.C.W.T. POWDER™

32


SAFETY AND HANDLING




33MARICHEM®


®MMMM COOLING WATER TREATMENT

MARICHEM S-Fe™

DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM S-Fe is a concentrated aqueousliquid product formulated to control marine bio-logical fouling of marine microorganisms suchas bacteria and fungi and macro organisms suchas barnacles, mussels and clams without harm-ing higher life forms. MARICHEM S-Fe has awide range of applications in all seawater cool-ing lines, seawater intakes, trimming tanks, bal-last tanks etc.


- Very effective on marine biological foulingcontrol in all seawater intake systems whilstprotecting them from erosion and heavy scaleaccumulation.

- Provides quick and thorough treatment.- Safe to use on all metals and metal alloys. - Non-flammable, non-corrosive and non-toxic.- No known effect on rubber or plastic com-

pounds. - Can be combined with a range of other prod-

ucts.- No heating is required upon application and it

is completely biodegradable.- Maintains heat transfer in the system.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MARICHEM S-Fe is a concentrated liquid con-sisting of a blend of superior inorganic acids,corrosion inhibitors and non-ionic, surface-active agents. Appearance / Color : Clear, brown liquidSpecific gravity : 1.12/15°CSolubility : CompletepH (1% Solution) : 3.0-4.0

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of MARICHEM S-Fe is propor-tional to the capacity of seawater flow in thesystem, the desired treatment levels, the typeand kind of the system in question, the availabledowntime and the degree of contamination ofthe system to be treated.The recommended dosage is 0.9 litres ofMARICHEM S-Fe for every 100 tons of sea-water flowing through the system per hour. Theabove mentioned dosage should be dosed dur-ing a one hour period and repeated every 48hours. The frequency of dosage may be lessdepending on the degree of fouling.B. Feeding Procedure

Once the quantity of MARICHEM S-Fe hasbeen determined, its application must take placeby use of the MARICHEM DOSING SYS-TEM, into all the main seawater suction filters.This is feasible to accomplish when the DOS-ING SYSTEM tubing is tapped to the main sea-water feeding line.Note that the DOSING SYSTEM must be posi-tioned above the main seawater suction unit,over the seawater level in order to reach maxi-mum gravity flow into the filter system whilesuction is in operation.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: MARICHEM S-Feshould not be fed to a system while the sea wa-ter is being drawn as makeup for an evaporatoror water maker. Either isolate the evaporator orshut it down while MARICHEM S-Fe is beingdosed and for at least 30 minutes afterward.

34


SAFETY AND HANDLING




MARICHEM®

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT

P A R T I I I

DESCRIPTION

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT is a concentrat-ed chemical compound consisting of polymerelectrolytes and antifoam additives. It is used inevaporators in order to prevent scale build-up.Furthermore, acts as an antifoam agent.


- Can be applied to all evaporators. - Improves the quality of distilled water.- Protects against scale formation.- Acts as a foam eliminator.- Easy to apply and use.- Cost effective due to its concentrated state.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT is a homoge-neous, incombustible, non-corrosive and of lowmolecular weight. It is stable at high tempera-tures whilst acting as an efficacious diffuser.It is important to note that EVAPORATORTREATMENT does not contain Ammonia orPhosphate.Appearance / Color : Colorless,

limpid liquidOdor : SoftSpecific gravity : 1.03-1.04/15°CpH : 9-10Thermal Firmness : 250°C

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT should beapplied in a proportion of 15-35 ml/ton of dis-tilled water. In the presence of scale depositsthe volume of the product should be doubled to30-70 ml/ton of distilled water. If the problemof scale deposits is greater than anticipated, thevolume of Evaporator Treatment must beincreased according to the operator's estima-tions. B. Feeding Procedure

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT must be intro-duced by means of a dosing system with a flowmeter, through the vacant side of the evapora-tor.Note that in order to reach maximum results indistilled water production, the evaporator mustbe chemically cleaned approximately every 1-1.5 months.

37MARICHEM®


®MMMM EVAPORATOR TREATMENT

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT™ (MARIVAP)

38

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT

SAFETY AND HANDLING




39MARICHEM®


®MMMM FUEL TREATMENT

FUEL OIL TREATMENT™

DESCRIPTION

FUEL OIL TREATMENT is a fuel oil additivespecifically designed to act as a water emulsi-fier and also to disperse and dissolve sludge inall types of fuel grades. This way, fuel blendsgain a homogeneous nature while compatibilityproblems are reduced.


- Disperses and dissolves sludge based hydro-carbons.

- Breaks water emulsions resulting in the effi-cient separation from oil when centrifuged.

- Prevents sludge formation and carbonaceousdeposits.

- Maintains homogeneity and stabilization ofthe fuel, this improves combustion.

- Can be used as a degreasing agent whenrequired.

- Absolutely soluble in the fuel.- Has anticorrosive properties and is highly sta-

ble.- Cost effective, easy to handle and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

FUEL OIL TREATMENT is a liquid mixture ofsolvents, dispersants and emulsifying agentsthat results in a maximum performance of thetreated fuel oil.Appearance / Color : Clear, red liquid Specific gravity : 0.87/20°CFlash Point : > 40°COdor : Strong aromatic

solvent odorPACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container562001 20 Steel drum562101 210 Steel drum

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity suggested for fuel oil treatment isa proportion of 1 litre of F.O.T. for every 4-6cubic meters of fuel.B. Feeding Procedure

After the quantity of F.O.T. has been deter-mined, it must be added to the main storagetanks before fuel loading or to the deep tanksthrough to the entire fuel system.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

Emulsion Formation and F.O.T.

In general, heavy oils form stable emulsionswith water, a lot easier than light oils withwater; these stable emulsions are difficult tobreak. Moreover, heavy bunker oils are contam-inated with traces of water and when these arecombined with condensation moisture andheavier hydrocarbons, they form emulsions. Asa result, these emulsions increase the degree ofsludge formation in the fuel tank and they alsocause problems to the burners during combus-tion.Another difficulty are the separations, at lowtemperatures, between high molecular con-stituents (such as paraffin) when various typesof fuels are blended. F.O.T. is specifically engi-neered to encounter and treat 100% of theabove mentioned anomalies.

Atomization and F.O.T.

F.O.T. contains surface-active agents, whichreduce the limit of surface tension between oiland air, consequently; this results in fine atom-ization within the burner. This way, we have amore even fuel distribution throughout theburner, thus achieving a better fuel utilization,through complete combustion. Therefore,energy is preserved by the saving of fuel.

40

FUEL TREATMENT

HANDLING Handle with care. Store in a dry, cool and well ventilated environment.

SAFETY IMMEDIATE ACTIONS

Eye Contact

Avoid Eye contact. Otherwise, flush with plenty of water for a few minutes. Seek medical attention.

Skin Contact

Avoid Skin contact. Otherwise, wash contaminated area thoroughly with water. Seek medical attention.

Inhalation

Avoid inhalation of vapors. Otherwise, seek fresh air source at once. Seek medical attention.

If Swallowed

Avoid ingestion. Otherwise, consume a considerable quantity of water. Seek medical attention.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Avoid spillage, splashing and mishandling. Precautionary measures for body protection are strongly recommended before use.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




DESCRIPTION

F.O.T. 10 is a concentrated liquid mixture oforganic components, which can be added to allmarine fuel grades; it acts as a catalyst in orderto improve combustion.


- 100% oil-soluble.- Reduces the ignition point of fuel.- Prevents and disperses sludge formations thus

increasing fuel flow and homogeneity. - Reduces smoke emissions, soot development

and carbon/ash deposits.- Eliminates acid corrosion by inhibiting

gaseous acids.- Minimizes fuel consumption due to its

upgrading action to the fuel's quality.- Can be used with a range of other products.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.- Overall, it provides improved fuel atomiza-

tion and increased combustion efficiency,whilst protecting the internal combustionparts of the engine that are coming into con-tact with the fuel.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

F.O.T. 10 is a 100% ash-less, non-abrasive liq-uid compound containing no metal complexes.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CFlash Point : > 40°COdor : Strong aromatic

solvent odor

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of F.O.T. 10 suggested for treat-ment is 1 litre per 4-6 cubic meters of fuel.This proportion can vary though, it can varyaccording to the quantity of the fuel to betreated, the operation handling procedures inprogress and in particular the characteristics ofthe engine, as specified by the manufacturer.However, these variances can be adjustedagainst the test results obtained and the opera-tor's experience. B. Feeding Procedure

F.O.T. 10 must be applied to the system in ques-tion, by continuous feeding into the fuel line orinto the settling tank. In any case, the use of ametering pump is recommended; it provides theadvantage of appropriate dispersion under stan-dard treatment conditions.

41MARICHEM®



F.O.T. 10™

42

FUEL TREATMENT

SAFETY AND HANDLING




43MARICHEM®



F.O.T. C-100™

DESCRIPTION

F.O.T. C-100 is a unique product specificallydesigned to increase fuel energy efficiencyupon consumption and to reduce combustiondeposits. This innovative formula combinessuperior quality ingredients, which result to itscatalytic action as a fuel additive and depositeliminator for all types of diesel engines thatoperate on heavy oils. Additionally, it is engi-neered to eliminate heavy metal depositionssuch as Vanadium, Sulfur, Lead, etc.


- Reduces low and high temperature acid corro-sion.

- Reduces carbonaceous combustion depositsby increasing the combustion temperatureenough to fragment and force them to pass outof the engines through burning with the fuel.

- Reduces heavy metal deposits such asVanadium, Sulfur and Sodium formed bypoor quality heavy fuels in the same way asthe carbonaceous combustion deposits.

- Preserves engine condition and especiallyvital parts such as the exhaust spaces, thevalves, the turbochargers and engine headsfrom acid corrosion and carbon ash build-up.

- Assists in the blending of different grade fuelsand the dispersion of sludge.

- Increases fuel efficiency, this results in fuelsaving.

- Completely soluble in oil.- Can be used with a specific range of other

products.- Easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

F.O.T. C-100 is an ash-less, non-abrasive, 100%oil-soluble, organometallic liquid compound.Appearance / Color : Clear, dark red-brown

liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CFlash Point : > 40°C Odor : Strong aromatic

solvent odor

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The proportion of F.O.T. C-100 to be used is 1litre for 6-8 cubic meters of fuel.This proportion can vary though, it can varyaccording to the quantity of the fuel to betreated, the operation handling procedures inprogress and in particular the characteristics ofthe engine, as specified by the manufacturer.Therefore, in order to reach maximum results,the dose required may be linked to the above-mentioned factors when observations of the endresults are considered. B. Feeding Procedure

F.O.T. C-100 is in fed, at a continuous rate, intothe fuel tank of the fuel treatment system or intothe fuel line by means of a metering pump.

44

FUEL TREATMENT

SAFETY AND HANDLING




DESCRIPTION

FUEL BIOCONTROL is a special designed liq-uid biocide that provides complete controlagainst bacteria and microorganisms, which caninfect fuel storage tanks and fuel systems,therefore degrading the fuel properties.


- Powerful at the fuel-water interface where mi-crobe growth is most dynamic.

- Maintains homogeneity and stabilization ofthe fuel, this leads to the improved combus-tion.

- Provides complete disappearance of the mi-croorganisms, which contaminate fuel storagetanks and systems.

- Can be added directly to the fuel tank.- Cost effective, easy to handle and use.- Prevents corrosion in fuel systems. - Keeps filters, nozzles and injectors free from

clogging.- Will not harm metallic parts and synthetic

rubber. - Completely biodegradable with fast results.- Characterized by its very good biocidal and

biostatic effect.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

FUEL BIOCONTROL is a liquid mixture of or-ganic solvents and highly effective biocides. Ithas the following physical properties: Appearance / Color : Red liquidSpecific Gravity : 0.85/15°COdor : Characteristic

petroleum - like odorFlash Point : > 40°C

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container562004 20 Steel drum

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

FUEL BIOCONTROL dosage depends on anumber of factors such as the type of systembeing treated, the nature and the extent ofmicrobial contamination and the degree of con-trol required.In case of preventive treatment, 0.2 lt - 0.4 lt ofFUEL BIOCONTROL must be added per toneof fuel. For the contaminated fuel distillation 2lt of FUEL BIOCONTROL is a sufficient quan-tity per tone of fuel. In cases of filter blockages a shock dosing of 10lt FUEL BIOCONTROL is recommended pertone of fuel. B. Feeding Procedure

FUEL BIOCONTROL is best added to thedewatered tank that is about a third full. Whenthe tank is filled, the product is mixed into thesystem.In cases of heavy fouling, the system should, ifpossible, be cleaned before FUEL BIOCON-TROL is used.

45MARICHEM®



FUEL BIOCONTROL™

46

FUEL TREATMENT

SAFETY AND HANDLING




47MARICHEM®



SOOT CLEANER™

DESCRIPTION

SOOT CLEANER is a highly effective powdercompound that acts as a combustion catalyst inorder to easily remove soot and ash depositsfrom surfaces where accumulation exists. Sootaccumulation occurs, as a result of the fuelcombustion that takes place during the ignitionperiod or the soot blowing operation. Sootcleaner is applicable to all types of boiler anddiesel exhaust systems due to its characteristicaction to explode when it enters the combustionflame.


- Reduces soot and ash deposits at a controlledrate.

- Eliminates the risk of hazardous soot fires.- Effectively protects steel surfaces against

ware off and short life duration caused by ashand soot build up and very high temperatures.

- Reduces the ignition point temperature of sootand fire scale, which results in easy combus-tion of carbon deposits forming an easily re-movable dry ash.

- Prevents acid from forming, reducing the riskof corrosion.

- Induces fuel efficiency which contributes tofuel saving.

- Increases heat transfer and can maximizeboiler efficiency.

- Minimizes cleaning and maintenance cost.- Easy to handle and apply.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

SOOT CLEANER is a dry powder com-pounded by specific combustion catalysts, for-mulated to intrude and break fused ash depositsand strong bonded carbonaceous deposits bydislocating the combustion binders due to itsexplosive action inside the exhaust system.

Appearance / Color : Green, thin granulespowder

Specific gravity : 1.20-1.30/15°CFlash Point : None

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of Soot Cleaner to be used is sug-gested at a ratio of 1 kg per 400-500 squaremeters of surface area on a daily basis. Noticethat the above quantity may be altered, depend-ing on the system to be treated, based on partic-ular variations and/or the manufacturer's techni-cal specifications.B. Cleaning Procedure

SOOT CLEANER is applicable to many sys-tems such as diesel exhaust gas economizers,fire tube boilers, main boilers, etc.In the case of diesel exhaust economizers, theproduct is applied upstream, of the area beingtreated into the exhaust gas system.In the case of boilers, the product is appliedfrom a suitable port point of the system.Make sure that the powder is spread through to-wards the backside of the combustion chamber.

48

FUEL TREATMENT

SAFETY AND HANDLING




49MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

SOOT CLEANER LIQUID is a water-based,magnesium-containing liquid formulated to actas a combustion catalyst in order to easilyremove soot and ash deposits from surfaceswhere accumulation has occurred during fuelcombustion. It is applicable to all types ofboiler and diesel engine exhaust systems. It is alow viscosity liquid, making handling and feed-ing easy.SOOT CLEANER LIQUID works to controlfireside slagging and fouling by increasing themelting point and the friability of ash con-stituents, making deposits easier to remove dur-ing normal soot blowing and out-of-servicecleaning. It is also effective in controlling cold-end corrosion and acid smut emissions.

LITERATURE - TECHNOLOGY

Combustion-related problems in boilers includeslagging, fouling, high temperature corrosionand cold-end corrosion of heat transfer surfacesand other boiler components.Deposition is related to the presence of impuri-ties in the fuels being burned being combinedwith combustion practices. High temperaturedeposition will occur when molten ash derivedfrom fuel impurities, comes into contact withthe metal surfaces of the boiler and solidifies.When this "slag" contacts a metal surface, addi-tional ash particles become trapped within thesticky molten mass, this results in fouling anduncontrolled heavy slagging. Once depositshave formed, corrosion can result beneath. Sootblowing may not be able to remove these tena-cious deposits. Continuous build up, will resultin lost efficiency and reduced throughput of theboiler. High temperature corrosion causes metalloss and eventual tube failure.SOOT CLEANER LIQUID combines with var-ious ash constituents to raise their melting

points and weaken their deposit structure. Thispermits the ash to pass through the boiler as asolid and increases friability of any deposits,which do form, making deposit removal easierby means of soot blowing or off-line cleaning.Sulfur trioxide (SO3) is formed from the com-bustion of sulfur contained in fuels. It combineswith water vapor in the flue gas to form SulfuricAcid. The acid corrodes metal surfaces that arebelow the acid dew point. This condition is typ-ically referred to as low temperature or cold-end corrosion. In addition, the corrosion prod-ucts can block gas passages between tubes.SOOT CLEANER LIQUID reduces the cat-alytic conversion of Sulfur dioxide (SO2) in theflue gas to Sulfur trioxide (SO3). Preventing theformation of SO3 in the flue gas can also resultin lower stack opacity. Also, SOOT CLEANER LIQUID directlyinhibits acid corrosion by neutralizing Sulfurtrioxide (SO3) and coating the tube surfaces.


- A non-hazardous liquid.- Reduces slagging and fouling.- Effective in controlling cold-end corrosion

and acid smut emissions.- Reduces high-temperature corrosion as well

as cold-end corrosion and fouling.- Provides better soot blowing results.- Eliminates the risk for hazardous soot fires.- Results to higher boiler efficiency and relia-

bility.- Induces fuel efficiency thus contributing to

fuel saving. - Minimizes costs associated with maintenance

and downtime.- Easy to use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

SOOT CLEANER LIQUID is a water-based,magnesium containing liquid, formulated with

FUEL TREATMENT

SOOT CLEANER LIQUID™

50

a dispersant to enhance product dispersion infuel oil. As a water-based product, it has noflash point issues and is not sensitive to mois-ture ingress. Appearance / Color : Yellow to amber liquidOdor : MildFlash Point : > 100°CSolubility in Water : Completely solubleDensity : 1.34 g/cm3 at 20°CpH (concentrated product) : 5.0

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of SOOT CLEANER LIQUID tobe used can depend on many factors such as thetype of problem and its severity; we must also

take into consideration the design and operatingcharacteristics of the boiler. The suggestedquantity of SOOT CLEANER LIQUID is 1 litreper 4-6 cubic meters of fuel. Note that the abovequantity may be altered, depending on the typeof system to be treated, based on particularvariations in the quality of the fuel and/or themanufacturer's technical specifications.

B. Cleaning Procedure

SOOT CLEANER LIQUID is applicable tomany systems such as diesel exhaust gas econ-omizers, fire tube boilers, main boilers, etc.In the case of diesel exhaust systems, the prod-uct is applied upstream, of the area beingtreated into the exhaust gas system.In the case of boilers, the product is appliedfrom a suitable port point of the system, prefer-ably with an injector, making sure that the liq-uid is spread right through towards the backsideof the combustion chamber.

FUEL TREATMENT

SAFETY AND HANDLING




MARICHEM®

P A R T I

TANK CLEANERS

53MARICHEM®


®MMMM TANK CLEANERS

ALCACLEAN H.D.™

DESCRIPTION

ALCACLEAN H.D. is a high quality productclassified as a general cleaner/remover of veg-etable oil, animal oil, fat, fuel oil, lube oil andpet coke residues from cargo and storage tanksas well as to other systems. Furthermore, itremoves carbonaceous deposits, resulting fromcar exhausts that can exist in a ships garagearea, roof walls and hull sides. This powerfulconcentrated formula provides immediate andefficient results whilst also acting as an odoreliminator.Its use on Aluminum, Zinc and Tin surfacecoatings is prohibited unless further dilutionwith water has been conducted.


- A non-flammable liquid mixture. - Effectively dissolves all fat, vegetable and

animal oil, dry or not.- Efficiently removes pet coke deposits. - Can be used as a general purpose cleaner to

remove oil and grease deposits. - An odor binder and eliminator.- Can be combined with a specific range of

products.- Soluble in fresh and sea water. - Acts as an acid-neutralizing agent.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). ALCACLEAN H.D. was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

ALCACLEAN H.D. is a water solvent alkalineconcentrated liquid solution, consisting of spe-cific salts, detergents and wetting agents. Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidOdor : Odorless Specific gravity : 1.22/15°CpH : 13 Flash Point : None

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container833003 30 Plastic jerrican832103 210 Steel drum

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Rock and Roll method: Add 15-20 litres ofALCACLEAN H.D. for every ton of fresh orsea water when the tank is filled to 30% of itscapacity.Circulation method: A solution of 5-10% mustbe prepared by diluting ALCACLEAN H.D.with fresh or sea water.Injection method: Prepare a solution of 5-10%by diluting ALCACLEAN H.D. with fresh orsea water.


Rock and Roll method: After you have filledthe tank with water (fresh or sea) to 30% of itscapacity and added the required amount ofALCACLEAN H.D., let it stand for approxi-mately 24 hours. Then fill with more water to90% of the tank's capacity level. This way thetank will be cleaned by natural agitation due towave motion. Leave for a few days, then drainthe tank completely and rinse off by ballasting -deballasting the tank 2-3 times with water.

54

SAFETY AND HANDLING

Circulation method: After the solution is pre-pared, apply by circulating for approximately 6-8 hours. Thereon, wash thoroughly with water.Injection method: When the prescribed solu-tion is prepared, inject directly to the contami-nated area. Afterwards, rinse thoroughly withwater.

TANK CLEANERS




55MARICHEM®



CEMENT REMOVER™

DESCRIPTION

CEMENT REMOVER is an effective acidbased liquid mixture specifically designed todeal with hard cases of cement cargo depositsor dry cement stains. Its proven advantage is theprovision of immediate penetration and com-plete dissolution of cement, the result being athorough cleaning.ADVANTAGES AND CHARACTERISTICS

- Ideal for the removal of cement deposits anddry stains.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly.- Applicable to all metal surfaces and parts ex-

cept those being galvanized and those madeof Tin, Zinc and Aluminum.

- Water-soluble and non-flammable liquid mix-ture.

- Safe to use on rubber and plastic compounds. - Can be combined with a specific range of oth-

er products.- Replaces the use of other products, which fail

to treat awkward situations like the removalof salt deposits and other hard deposits suchas rust.

- Cost effective, easy to apply and use. During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). CEMENT REMOVER was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

CEMENT REMOVER is an aqueous acid liq-uid solution assisting in the neutralization ofbasic systems also used for the pickling andcleaning of metal parts.

Appearance / Color : Clear, red liquid.Specific gravity : 1.16/15°CSolubility : AppreciablepH (1% Solution) : 1Odor : Pungent

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Undiluted: In cases where we deal with heavydeposit build-up, CEMENT REMOVER mustbe applied undiluted.Diluted: In cases of light deposition on largesurface areas, a solution of 10-40% may beused. B. Cleaning Procedure

Undiluted/Diluted: In parts such as corner cav-ities, tank skeleton inlets, etc, CEMENTREMOVER must be carefully poured and/orapplied by conventional means such as a hardbrush, mop, sponge or any other manualdevices feasible to move with rapid and irregu-lar action. Let it soak for 15 minutes.Afterwards, wash thoroughly by applying high-pressure water source.In case of deposit persistence, repeat the clean-ing procedure.

56

TANK CLEANERS

SAFETY AND HANDLING




57MARICHEM®



LIME CLEANER™

DESCRIPTION

LIME CLEANER is a concentrated acid-basedliquid product designed to attack and eliminatelimestone, caustic lime deposits and dry limestains from cargo tanks and other large commonmetal surface installations. LIME CLEANER isformulated with strong acids, surface-activeagents and special corrosion inhibitors, suffi-cient enough to neutralize strong alkaline-caus-tic conditions.


- Ideal for the removal of limestone, birdlimeand dry lime stains from all common metaltanks and installations.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly.- Applicable to all metal surfaces and parts

except those being galvanized and those madeof Tin, Zinc, Aluminum and Lead.

- A water-soluble, non-flammable liquid mix-ture.

- Can be used to safely neutralize strong alka-line liquids and solids.

- No known effect on rubber or plastic com-pounds.

- May be combined with a specific range ofother products.

- Replaces the use of other products, which failto treat awkward situations like the removalof salt deposits and other hard deposits suchas rust.

- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO).

LIME CLEANER was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet the

requirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

LIME CLEANER is a concentrated aqueous so-lution consisting of a blend of acids, specialsurfactants and specific corrosion inhibitors.

Appearance / Color : Clear, light red liquidSpecific gravity : 1.10-1.20/15°CSolubility : AppreciablepH : 1-1.5Odor : Acidic

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

LIME CLEANER must be used in quantitiesproportional to the tank surface area that is to becovered, the extent of contamination, the avail-able downtime and the application methodbeing used. Therefore, the actual quantityneeded cannot be prescribed beforehand, sincethe operator is the best placed person, to decidethe required quantity, analogous to the situationat hand.B. Cleaning Procedure

LIME CLEANER may be applied by two meth-ods, injection and soaking.Injection is a method where a high-pressuremachine, suitable to process chemical solu-tions, is used with a 50% LIME CLEANER/water solution to inject directly onto the tanksurface area. Then, the solution must be left toact for 15 minutes followed by thorough rinsingusing a high-pressure water supply source.Thereafter, the surface must be left to dry.

58

TANK CLEANERS

Note that percentage dilutions may vary de-pending on the thickness and hardness of thedeposited lime layer.Soaking is a method where LIME CLEANERis used undiluted and applied with conventionalmethods such as an elongated thick and hardbrush, a hard sponge etc.Once applied, LIME CLEANER must be left tosoak for 30 minutes. Thereafter, thorough rins-ing with water is necessary, followed by leavingthe surface to dry.Usually, this method is applicable to heavilycontaminated small and large tank surface areasand installations.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




59MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM P.C.S. is an innovative, concen-trated liquid product specifically engineered toattack, penetrate and remove pet coke accumu-lations from cargo and storage tanks.Additionally, it may also be used to removemineral deposits and eliminate bad odors intanks and other closed systems.


- Effectively removes pet coke and mineraldeposits from cargo holds and tanks.

- Can also be efficiently used as a general pur-pose cleaner to eliminate bad odors in tanksand other closed systems.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly.- Can safely be used on all metals and metal

alloys (even if painted/varnished).- Non-flammable, non-toxic, non-conductive

and non-volatile.- Soluble in seawater and fresh water.- No known effect on rubber or plastic com-

pounds. - May be combined with a specific range of

other products.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). MARICHEM P.C.S. was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MARICHEM P.C.S. is a concentrated liquidsolution containing powerful surface - active

agents, a corrosion inhibitor and aqueous chem-ical agents.Appearance / Color : Clear, light

yellow liquid.Specific gravity : <1.5/20°CpH (1% Solution) : 11.5-12.5Odor : Chlorine-like

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container833037 30 Plastic jerrican832138 210 Plastic drum

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

MARICHEM P.C.S. may be used concentratedor diluted with water, depending on the degreeof contamination, the surface area to be treated,the desired degree of cleaning and the availabledowntime.Actually, the user is the best one capable to reg-ulate the quantity and concentration to be usedfor the situation at hand.In any case, when the accumulation is notheavy, a 50% solution with water must be used.Otherwise, MARICHEM P.C.S. can be usedundiluted especially when deposition is heavyand hard spots persist. B. Cleaning Procedure

Conventional cleaning methods such as a brush,hard sponge, thick and hard broom and /or amop can be used on heavy duty and hard staindeposits.Note that for heavy accumulations the cleaningprocedure might be necessary to be repeateduntil the results are satisfactory. Furthermore, isimportant to keep in mind that 1 litre ofMARICHEM P.C.S. may cover a surface areaof 8-10 sq. meters.

TANK CLEANERS

MARICHEM P.C.S.™

60

TANK CLEANERS

SAFETY AND HANDLING




61MARICHEM®



MARICHEM T.T.C.™

DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM T.T.C. is a concentrated petrol-eum solvent-based liquid compound formulatedwith strong aromatic solvents, emulsifyingagents and surface-active agents in order toattack, penetrate and dissolve heavy oil con-tamination, grease, petrochemical compoundsand light carbonaceous deposits, which areaccumulated in oil coolers, preheated doublebottoms, bilges, deep tanks etc. Furthermore, itacts as a sludge conditioner.


- Effectively removes and dissolves mineraloils, grease, petrochemicals and carbonresidues from tank surfaces, engine rooms,mechanical installations, engine units, partsand components that experience heavy depo-sition.

- A powerful sludge conditioner. - Provides a quick and thorough emulsifying

action. - Can safely be used on all metal surfaces and

its alloys (even if painted).- No known effect on rubber and plastic com-

pounds.- May be used as a general purpose cleaner to

remove oil and grease deposits.- Non-corrosive, non-conductive and of low

toxicity.- Disperses in water to form a milky-white

emulsion before the separation of water fromoil.

- Can be combined with a specific range ofproducts.

- Reduces emulsion carryover and permitswater-oil mixtures to separate into an aqueousphase and an oil phase.


During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). MARICHEM T.T.C. was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MARICHEM T.T.C. is a powerful liquid blendof powerful petroleum solvents, superior emul-sifying agents and high grade surfactants.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CSolubility in water : Miscible Flash Point : > 40°COdor : Characteristic aromatic

solvent odor

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

MARICHEM T.T.C. may be applied fully con-centrated or diluted with water. The quantity tobe used is proportional to the degree of contam-ination, the available downtime, the surfacearea to cover and the desired degree of clean-ing. For heavy contamination, MARICHEMT.T.C. may be used undiluted, where as forlighter contamination we suggest a 30-50%solution with water. For tank cleaning andsludge conditioning various strength solutionsbetween 0.1-0.3% may be used.

62


The application of MARICHEM T.T.C. may bedone by agitation, recirculation and/or soakingimmersion.Rock and Roll method: This method is applica-ble for tank cleaning at sea. Fill the tank with0.1-0.3% of MARICHEM T.T.C. and let thesolution to act for 2-6 hours. This will enablethe solution to soften, penetrate and dissolve thehard bottom deposits, which have formed. Thenfill with seawater at 30% of the tank's capacityand let the solution stand for approximately 1-2days time. In that period cleaning will be initi-ated due to wave motion. Then fill with moreseawater to 60% of the tank's capacity and leavethe solution to act long enough, so that com-plete cleaning due to wave motion/natural agi-tation is accomplished. Afterwards, dischargethe tank out and rinse off by filling the tank 1-2times its capacity with seawater.

Note that MARICHEM T.T.C. must always befed to the tank and then to the bunkers.Recirculation method: It is recommended touse the desired solution according to the degreeof contamination and number of tanks to becleaned with this solution. For this reason thedose rates and results of the cleaning may vary,but as minimum dosage a 0.5% solution of theproduct must be used. The best result isachieved around 70°C. Slop water should bepumped ashore or should be pumped to ship’sslop tanks after finishing with the cleaning pro-cedure.Soaking Immersion method: After the solutionis prepared, immerse the part, component orunit to be cleaned, and leave it to soak for 30minutes. Afterwards, rinse thoroughly withwater.

TANK CLEANERS

SAFETY AND HANDLING




63MARICHEM®



TANK CLEANER™

DESCRIPTION

TANK CLEANER is a powerful solvent emul-sifier, consisting of emulsifying agents, surfac-tants, strong solvents and corrosion inhibitors.Its main purpose is the cleaning of double bot-tom tanks, deep tanks, bilges, etc, that havebecome contaminated with oil residues andpetroleum base compounds. Furthermore, itmay be used as a general degreaser in specialsituations where optimum results are sought.


- A concentrated degreasing solution, ideal foruse in cleaning cargo tanks, deep tanks, bilgesand pipelines.

- Non-corrosive and of low toxicity.- When mixed with water, a milky white emul-

sion is formed.- No known effect on rubber or plastic com-

pounds.- Can be used as a general degreaser in very

difficult cleaning situations.- It may be applied to all kinds and types of

metal surfaces, painted or not.- May be combined with a specific range of

products.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use. During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-

mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO).

TANK CLEANER was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

TANK CLEANER is a blend of aliphatic sol-vents, non-ionic and anionic surface agents,emulsifying agents and corrosion inhibitors.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 0.80/15°CFlash Point : > 40°COdor : Slightly aromatic odorPACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container832029 20 Steel drum832129 210 Steel drumAPPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of TANK CLEANER to be usedis proportional to the tank capacity, the level ofcontamination and the degree of cleaningrequired, as such; appropriate dosing can bedecided by consulting the table found in thenext page. NOTE: The dosage to be used mustbe based on the total tank capacity and not onthe water percentage to be ballasted in the tank.B. Cleaning Procedure

Preparation: Before applying TANKCLEANER, prepare the tanks that are to becleaned by washing them first (if this is possi-ble), with a high-pressure warm water supply.When not at sea: Determine the quantity ofTANK CLEANER to be used and fill 75% oftank capacity with seawater. In order to achieveoptimum results, the emulsion formed must bewarmed and maintained at 60 C for at least 3-5days (if possible). At the end of the three daystime, deballast the tanks of the cleaning solu-tion and rinse clean with seawater by ballastingand deballasting until the water flow becomesclear. NOTE: In cases, where tanks are heavilystained or contaminated, the cleaning proceduremust be repeated, as described above.Rock and Roll method: This method is applica-ble for tank cleaning at sea. Fill the tank with0.1-0.3% of TANK CLEANER and leave solu-tion to act for 2-6 hours. This will enable thesolution to soften, penetrate and dissolve the

64

TANK CLEANERS

hard bottom deposits. Then fill the tank withseawater to 30% of total capacity and let thesolution stand for approximately 1-2 days.During this period, cleaning will be initiateddue to wave motion. After that, fill the tank withseawater to 60% of total capacity and let thesolution act for long enough, so that completecleaning can be accomplished, due to wavemotion/natural agitation. Afterwards, dischargesolution from tank and then rinse off by fillingtank 1-2 times its capacity with seawater. Notethat TANK CLEANER must always be fed tothe tank and then to the bunkers.Recirculation method: It is recommended touse the desired solution according to the degreeof contamination and number of tanks to becleaned with this solution. For this reason thedose rates and results of the cleaning may vary,but as minimum dosage a 0.5% solution of theproduct must be used. The best result isachieved around 70°C. Slop water should bepumped ashore or should be pumped to ship’sslop tanks after finishing with the cleaning pro-cedure.

General Cleaning: For general cleaning appli-cations, TANK CLEANER may be used bybrushing, soaking/immersion or any other con-ventional method that the user believes to besuitable for the situation at hand.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




65MARICHEM®



TANK CLEANER S™

DESCRIPTION

TANK CLEANER S is similar to TANKCLEANER with regards to its applications anduses. However, TANK CLEANER S is a morepowerful, heavy duty concentrated cleaningsolution, engineered to be used in the cleaningand gas freeing for double bottom tanks, wingtanks, tank lines, fuel oil tanks, etc, from oil andfuel contamination. Moreover, it is formulatedwith more advanced emulsifying agents,stronger surface-active agents, superior sol-vents and longer lasting corrosion inhibitors.


- A highly concentrated liquid blend of supe-rior, innovative constituents which contributeto the efficient removal and cleaning of cargotanks, deep tanks, wing tanks, tank lines,bilges, etc. from oil residues, petroleum basedchemicals, heavy dirt, grime and old sludgedeposits.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly. - Non-corrosive and of low toxicity.- When mixed with water, a milky white emul-

sion is formed.- No known effect on rubber or plastic com-

pounds. - Can be used as a multi-purpose degreaser in

extremely hard cleaning conditions.- It is safe to be applied to all kinds and types of

metal parts and surfaces (painted or not).- May be combined with a specific range of

products.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use. During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-

mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO).

TANK CLEANER S was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals

(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

TANK CLEANER S is a blend of superioraliphatic solvents, non-ionic and anionic sur-face agents, emulsifying agents and corrosioninhibitors.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CFlash Point : > 40°COdor : Strong aromatic

solvent odor

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USEA. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of TANK CLEANER S to be usedis proportional to the tank capacity, the level ofcontamination and the degree of cleaningrequired, as such; appropriate dosing can bedecided by consulting the table found in thenext page. NOTE: The dosage to be used must be based onthe total tank capacity and not on the water per-centage to be ballasted in the tank.


Preparation: Before applying TANK CLEAN-ER S, prepare the tanks that are to be cleaned bywashing them first (if this is possible), with ahigh-pressure warm water supply.

When not at sea: Determine the quantity ofTANK CLEANER S to be used and fill 75% ofthe tank capacity with seawater. In order to

66

TANK CLEANERS

achieve optimum results, the emulsion formedmust be warmed and maintained at 60 C for atleast 3-5 days (if possible). At the end of thethree days time, deballast the tanks of the clean-ing solution and rinse clean with seawater byballasting and deballasting until the water flowbecomes clear.NOTE: In cases, where tanks are heavilystained or contaminated, the cleaning proceduremust be repeated, as described above.Rock and Roll method: This method is applica-ble for tank cleaning at sea. Fill the tank with0.1-0.3% of TANK CLEANER-S and let solu-tion act for 2-6 hours. This will enable the solu-tion to soften, penetrate and dissolve the hardbottom deposits. Then fill the tank with seawa-ter to 30% of total capacity and let the solutionstand for approximately 1-2 days. During thisperiod, cleaning will be initiated due to wavemotion. After, fill the tank with seawater to 60%of total capacity and let the solution act for longenough, so that complete cleaning can beaccomplished, due to wave motion/natural agi-tation. Afterwards, discharge solution from tankand then rinse off by filling tank 1-2 times itscapacity with seawater. Note that TANKCLEANER S must always be fed to the tankand then to the bunkers.Recirculation Method: It is recommended touse the desired solution according to the degreeof contamination and number of tanks to becleaned with this solution. For this reason thedose rates and results of the cleaning may vary,but as minimum dosage a 0.5% solution of theproduct must be used. The best result isachieved around 70°C. Slop water should bepumped ashore or should be pumped to ship'sslop tanks after finishing with the cleaning pro-cedure. General Cleaning: For general cleaning appli-cations,TANK CLEANER S may be used bybrushing, soaking/immersion or any other con-ventional method that the user believes to besuitable for the situation at hand.

67MARICHEM®



SAFETY AND HANDLING




MARICHEM®

MAINTENANCE

P A R T I I

71MARICHEM®


®MMMM

AIR COOLER CLEANER™

MAINTENANCE

DESCRIPTION

AIR COOLER CLEANER is a concentratedliquid solution of aromatic hydrocarbons, pow-erful surfactants, corrosion inhibitors andstrong emulsifying agents designed to attack,penetrate and completely remove mineral oils,grease, soot and other carbonaceous depositsfrom air coolers and turbochargers in two &four stroke marine diesel engines.


- Efficiently removes oil, grease and carbon de-posits from marine engines air coolers andturbochargers.

- Can be safely used on all metals and metal al-loys, as well as on components of an enginewithout causing any damage.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly.- Prevents the ignition of oil, sludge and soot

accumulation.- Non corrosive, non-toxic and non-volatile.- Water-soluble and when dissolved forms a

white-milky emulsion.- No known effect on rubber and plastic com-


other products.- Cost effective, corrosion proof, easy to apply

and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

AIR COOLER CLEANER is an organic sol-vent-based liquid solution consisting of sur-face-active agents, a blend of aromatic hydro-carbons and powerful emulsifying agents.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CSolubility : AppreciableFlash point : > 40°COdor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of AIR COOLER CLEANER tobe used is proportional to the degree of accu-mulation, the available downtime and the sur-face area to be cleaned. In any case, whendesired, A.C.C. may be used undiluted and inquantities feasible to accomplish completeremoval of the deposits when the accumulationis heavy, where as in cases of light depositionA.C.C. may be used diluted in solutions withwater or diesel oil appropriate to accomplish thedesired cleaning.Using A.C.C. diluted with diesel oil or undi-luted is beneficiary as the solution may bereused for future oil removal on other engineparts. Note that the above-mentioned is not fea-sible when the A.C.C. is diluted with water. B. Cleaning Procedure

The application of A.C.C. can be done by cir-culation, soaking and injection method.Circulation is the method used when disman-tling of the air cooler is not possible. In thiscleaning procedure the air cooler is connectedto a buffer tank with inflow and outflow piping,the A.C.C. is circulated through, during a periodof 4-6 hours by use of a pump. The solutionmay be heated at a temperature up to 30°C sothat we ease the cleaning procedure and accom-plish better results. This will significantlyreduce the cleaning time, whilst improving thecleaning effect.Soaking is the method to be used on disman-tled air coolers; they should be immersed in abath filled with undiluted A.C.C. In the mean-

72

MAINTENANCE

time, the cleaning process can be started by agi-tating the solution, while heating should beapplied at approximately 30°C. Leave to soakfor approximately 2 hours, afterwards, removefrom bath, rinse with large amounts of warmwater under pressure, then blow-dry with air.Note that the immersion period and heatingtemperature are dependent on the severity ofcontamination.Injection is the method, which should be used

for the following cases, those dealing withstatic, those when dismantling is not possible,and those when the air cooler uses a high-pres-

sure machine. In this procedure, the A.C.C. isdirectly injected into the air cooler unit, whichis then left to soak for as long as is needed, inorder to keep the deposits soft. Afterwards,rinse thoroughly with plenty of fresh warmwater using a high pressure supply and blow itdry with air.Note that if necessary, the cleaning proceduremay be repeated depending on the degree ofdeposit accumulation. This cleaning method is only recommended ifapproved by engine manufacturers.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




DESCRIPTION

AIR COOLER CLEANER L.T. is a powerfulcleaning product familiar to AIR COOLERCLEANER, but it has a lower toxicity level. Itdissolves accumulated deposits, oil, grease andsoot, which are dissolved along with the prod-uct into the engine's cylinders where burning ofthe deposits takes place.


- Ideal for the removal of oil, grease, soot andcarbon deposits.

- Highly efficient when used for air coolers andturbochargers.

- Can safely be used, especially, when in oper-ation without damaging the engine or runningthe risk of fire.

- Maintains and keeps the air cooler clean sothat the air input inside the cylinder is in-creased, this results in the maximization ofhorsepower and fuel combustion.


PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

A.C.C. L.T. is a liquid compound consisting ofcorrosion inhibitors, ionic metal surface activa-tors and low toxicity aromatic hydrocarbons.Moreover, is important to note that it containsno chlorinated solvents. A light milky solutionis produced when diluted with water.

Appearance / Color : Colorless, clear liquidSpecific gravity : 0.82-0.85/15°COdor : Aromatic solvent

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

When the engine is in operation, the requiredquantity to be used is a 1:2 proportion dilutedwith water.When the engine is not in operation, A.C.C.L.T. will used undiluted and in quantitiesaccording to the judgment of the user and thedegree of deposit accumulation, until such time,that cleaning is complete. In this case, A.C.C.may also be used.


When the engine is in operation, the A.C.C.L.T./Water solution must be injected directlyinto the top surface area of air cooler andsprayed over it by means of the auxiliary chem-ical solutions application tank.Then rinse with water and dry by blowing withcompressed air. When the engine is not in oper-ation and A.C.C. is absent, then A.C.C. L.T.may be used according to the A.C.C. instruc-tions.

73MARICHEM®


®MMMM

AIR COOLER CLEANER L.T.™

MAINTENANCE

74

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




75MARICHEM®


®MMMM

ALCACTIVE LIQUID™

MAINTENANCE

DESCRIPTION

ALCACTIVE LIQUID is a water solvent basedliquid solution formulated to attack and removevegetable and animal fats and oils from epoxycoatings and from most of the common ferrousalloy metals. Moreover, it can safely be appliedon Tin, Zinc and/or Zinc Silicate, Aluminumand galvanized surface coatings and materials.


- A non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corro-sive liquid mixture.

- Acts as an odor binder and eliminator whilegiving off a soft scent.

- Effectively dissolves all fat, vegetable and an-imal oils, dry or not.

- Can safely be used on Tin, Zinc, Aluminumand any galvanized or epoxy surface coatings.

- Can be used as a general purpose cleaner toremove oil and grease deposits.

- May be applied to any ferrous alloy metals.- Ideal to use for "Gas-Free" when sprayed af-

ter any hydrocarbon cleaning process as it dis-charges an additional pleasant lemon aroma.


During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). ALCACTIVE LIQUID was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

ALCACTIVE LIQUID is a water based solventliquid solution, containing specific salts, deter-gents, wetting agents and corrosion inhibitors.

Appearance / Color : White liquidOdor : SoftSpecific gravity : 1.02/15°CpH : 8

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USEA. Dosing Procedure

Rock and Roll method: Add 15-20 litres ofALCACTIVE LIQUID for every ton of water atthe point where the tank is filled to 30% of itscapacity.Circulation method: A solution of 5-10% mustbe prepared by diluting ALCACTIVE LIQUIDwith water.Injection method: Prepare a solution of 3-6%by diluting ALCACTIVE LIQUID with water. B. Cleaning Procedure

Rock and Roll method: After you have filledthe tank with water (fresh or seawater) to 30%of its capacity and added the required amount ofALCACTIVE LIQUID, let it stand for approx-imately 24 hours. Then fill tank with morewater, up to 90% of its capacity level. This waythe tank will be cleaned by natural agitation dueto wave motion. Leave for a few days, thendrain the tank completely and rinse off by bal-lasting-deballasting the tank 2-3 times withwater.Circulation method: After the solution is pre-pared, apply by circulating for approximately 6-8 hours. Thereon, wash thoroughly with water.Injection method: When the prescribed solu-tion is prepared, inject directly to the contami-nated area. Afterwards, rinse thoroughly withwater.

76

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




77MARICHEM®


®MMMM

BIOACTIVE POWDER™

MAINTENANCE

DESCRIPTION

BIOACTIVE POWDER is a mixture of variousenzymes and spores, formulated to eliminatehazardous and toxic waste and their growth. Itwill also remove and dissolve solid organicwaste, natural oils, grease and tartar deposits.The enzymes and spores will break downorganic matter into simple compounds. It hasbeen designed for the cleaning of restrooms(toilets), vacuum toilets, bathing rooms, storagerooms, kitchen sinks, collection lines and ingeneral the sewage/sanitary system of the ves-sel. Furthermore, its concentrated scent pro-vides the added advantage of being an odoreliminator.


- Multi purpose cleaner for toilets, drains,showers, storage rooms, quarter rooms etc.

- Unclogs and maintains clearways in pipelinesand sewage sanitary systems.

- Acts quickly and efficiently, while being safeto use.

- Eliminates odor and is biologically active- Environmentally safe and completely

biodegradable.- No effects on rubber or plastic compounds.- May be used in combination with other clean-

ing products.- Cost effective, easy to handle and apply.- Acts as an anti-foaming agent and is water

soluble.PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

BIOACTIVE POWDER is a mixture of variousenzymes along with spores and vegetable cellscontaining powerful surfactants and bacterialstrains.BIOACTIVE POWDER works better under thefollowing parameters: Temperature : 20°C - 50°CpH : 5.5 - 9.0

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in Kgrs) Container555555 4 Plastic Pail

APPLICATION AND USE

BIOACTIVE POWDER is a mixture of variousenzymes and spores to be used in organic wastetreatment. Organic wastes contain a mixture ofcomplex compounds, which have to be brokendown to simple compounds before disposal.The enzymes of BIOACTIVE POWDERimmediately start to break down the organicwaste. The nutrient salts present in BIOAC-TIVE POWDER help to create a medium forthe spores to produce additional enzymes,which constantly break down proteins and fats. That way, BIOACTIVE POWDER reducesBiological Oxygen Demand (BOD), ChemicalOxygen Demand (COD) and Total SuspendedSolids (TSS).The initial dosage is 1 kgr of BIOACTIVEPOWDER for 15000 ltrs. Then, continue dosing 500 grs for 15000 ltrsonce a week to keep a clean system. Use of any additional acidic, alkaline or chlo-rine-based cleaner is not recommended, as willde-activate the bacterial action.

78

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




79MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

BUFFERSOL™

DESCRIPTION

BUFFERSOL is a revolutionary, concentratedliquid product engineered to attack, penetrateand remove deposits such as traces of lead, aro-matic hydrocarbons, chloride compounds andsulfide compounds from zinc-silicate coatedtank surfaces and articles. Furthermore, it is for-mulated with specific acids and corrosioninhibitors, pH buffered to efficiently bind andneutralize strong acid and alkaline compoundsin extreme cleaning conditions.


- Effectively removes lead, hydrocarbon, chlo-ride and sulfide deposits from zinc-silicatecoated tanks and articles.

- Prevents, maintains and protects from corro-sion.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly.- No known effect on rubber and plastic com-

pounds.- Non-flammable, non-corrosive and non-toxic.- A water soluble product that may be used with

a wide range of other products.- May be safely used on all common metal sur-

faces and their alloys, whether painted, var-nished or not.

- pH buffered, thus acting as a neutralizingagent in acidic or alkaline environments.


PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

BUFFERSOL is an aqueous concentrated liquidsolution consisting of a specific blend of acidsand corrosion inhibitors, pH buffered.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 1.05-1.08/15°CpH : 5,5Solubility : Very solubleOdor : Odorless

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container833033 30 Plastic jerrican832134 210 Steel drum

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of BUFFERSOL to be used is pro-portional to the degree of contamination, thesurface area to be treated, the desired degree forcleaning and the available downtime.In small systems, most frequently, BUFFER-SOL is used undiluted.In larger systems, where the circulation methodis required and contamination is normal, a 10%solution of BUFFERSOL with water is ade-quate, and should be enough in volume to fillthe tank up to 1% of its capacity. If the contam-ination is heavy, higher concentrated solutionswith BUFFERSOL must be made. Furthermore,more of the system's capacity must be filled, sothat greater quantities will be circulated.


In small tanks and small surface areas,BUFFERSOL may be applied by conventionalmethods with a brush, sponge or a mop.Once applied, BUFFERSOL must be left for aperiod long enough, for it to act effectively,whilst enabling us to wash it off, before it driesout. The application must be repeated two moretimes and finally rinsing with large quantities ofwater (preferably a high-pressure water sup-ply), for one hour, is accomplished. Then, thetreated surface should be left to dry.With Butterworth tank-washing systems, forlarge cargo tanks, a 10% solution of BUFFER-SOL with water must be used in order to fill 1%of the tank's volume capacity, which then is cir-culated for 2-6 hours at 20-70°C by the feedingpump, found below the tank's bottom, to the

80

MAINTENANCE

heater and then to the tank's sprinkler system.This way the solution is re-circulated, resultingin thorough cleaning.Also note that if the solution is still adequate,and contamination is not heavy, it can be usedfor washing 2-3 tanks. For this, the bottomvalve of the treated tank may be shut, allowingaccess of the solution through the system to thesecond tank. Likely, the same cleaning proce-dure is followed for the rest of the tanks.

For optimum results, especially in cases ofheavy contamination, fresh BUFFERSOL solu-tion may be used separately for each tank.

In all cases, after completion of the application,the solution must be discarded and the systemmust be washed with fresh water for at least onehour.

Note that when desired, BUFFERSOL mayonly be used diluted by making a solution withfresh, de-ionized or distilled water. In all cases,avoid the use of river or sea water.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




81MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

CARBON REMOVER™

DESCRIPTION

CARBON REMOVER is an advanced heavyduty liquid product formula specifically madeto attack, penetrate and efficiently remove com-pletely carbon, grease, oil, varnishes and otherheavy deposits from diesel engine blocks, gearboxes, pistons, rings, valves, atomizers, pipes,burners, coolers etc.CARBON REMOVER has been proven to bethe most effective product in its category due toits quick and complete action. This powerfulaction is based on a two-layer mechanism. Thetop-layer prevents the evaporation of thevolatile components in the bottom-layer. Thebottom-layer removes the deposited substances.This way, the deposits are trapped and bound,resulting in complete and safe removal.


- Removes completely heavy carbon, grease,oil, varnish and other deposits as well as oldpaint, resins and lacquer coatings.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly.- Non-flammable.- Non-corrosive to most metal surfaces and

parts, except those made from soft-mild steeland cast iron.

- Very good results are achieved under ambientcleaning conditions this eliminates the needfor mechanical means, requiring heat.

- Contains a strong corrosion inhibitor.- Water insoluble but hydrophilic.- Has effects on some rubber and plastic com-

pounds.- Carbon Remover is heavier than water, the

result being the formation of an aqueous anda solvent layer when water is added.



During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). CARBON REMOVER was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

CARBON REMOVER is a concentrated two-layer liquid solution with a strong aromatic sol-vent smell. The top-layer is dark red and consists ofaliphatic solvents and a corrosion inhibitor.The bottom-layer is brown and consists of aro-matic and chlorinated hydrocarbons, andanionic surface-active agents.Appearance / Color : Two layer liquid,

dark red (top) andlight brown (bottom)

Specific gravity : 1.20/15°CFlash Point : Not applicableOdor : Strong characteristic

aromatic solvent

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of CARBON REMOVER to beused cannot be prescribed, since it must be usedundiluted and in quantities sufficient enough totreat the problem at hand. In other words, thequantity depends on the degree of cleaningdesired and the contamination level. The opera-tor is basically the one to judge the actual quan-

82

MAINTENANCE

tity needed in order to accomplish a particularcleaning job.B. Cleaning Procedure

The application of CARBON REMOVER iscarried out using the soaking/immersionmethod. For this, undiluted CARBONREMOVER must be put into a steel bath, then,the parts/items for cleaning should to beimmersed and soaked for between 2-10 hourstime, depending on the degree ofdeposition/soiling. Afterwards, these treatedparts/items must be taken out from the bath andwashed thoroughly with a high-pressure watersupply jet system.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




83MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

CHLORIDE TABLETS™

DESCRIPTION

CHLORIDE TABLETS are a unique strongoxidizing disinfectant in solid tablet form,which when dissolved in water release activechlorine in the most efficient hypochlorous acidform. CHLORIDE TABLETS are ideal for theconditioning, by chlorination of swimmingpools, Jacuzzis, sewage and waste water sys-tems.


- Treats effectively pool, sewage and wastewater.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly. - A biocide, non toxic, non flammable and non

corrosive.- Can be safely applied to water, that is con-

tained in any metal tank (even if tank ispainted or coated).

- 100% water soluble under ambient condi-tions.

- No heat for dissolving is required.- Can be combined with a specific range of

products.- No known effects on rubber and plastic com-

pounds.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

CHLORIDE TABLETS are a strong oxidizerconsisting of Trichlorineisocuanuric acid,which undergoes hydrolysis upon contact withwater to release active chlorine as hypochlorousacid.

Appearance / Color : White, solid tabletsSpecific gravity : 1.10-1.20/20°CpH (10% solution) : 2.7-3.3Odor : Chlorine like odorSize : 75 mm Diameter

x 25 mm Height

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in kgrs) Container830506 5 Plastic jerrican

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The initial dosage for the treatment of pool,sewage and waste water should be 5 tablets forevery 100 m³ of water. Thereafter, the dailydosage should approximately be 1/10 of a tabletfor every 10 m³ of water. This is equivalent to20 grams of a tablet per 10m³ of water. Thisdosage will approximately release 2-5 ppm ofactive chlorine.B. Feeding Procedure

The water system in consideration must be fedby skimmers or in floating trays. Moreover,feeding can also be done by feeling the chlori-nating pipes when a concentration of 2-5 ppmof residual active chlorine is obtained. If theconcentration is shown to have dropped belowthe 2 ppm value, then use both chlorinatingpipes.Note that periodical washing of the chlorinatoris necessary. In this case, MARICHEMDESCALER LIQUID 555 or DESCALERPOWDER may be used.

84

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




85MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

DESCALER LIQUID 555™

DESCRIPTION

DESCALER LIQUID 555 is a superior, heavyduty, concentrated liquid acid solution specifi-cally designed to remove rust and water scalebuild-up from boilers, evaporators, heatexchangers, cooling systems, pipeline collec-tion systems etc.DESCALER LIQUID 555 is characterized bythe composition of high quality raw materialsand the quick effective results once applied.


- Ideal for the complete removal of scale andrust accumulation.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly without the ne-cessity for heating.

- Applicable to all ferrous metal surfaces andparts, except those being galvanized and thosemade of Tin, Zinc, Lead and Aluminum.

- Water-soluble, non-flammable and non-volatile.

- Has no known effect on rubber and plastic. - May be combined with a specific range of

other products.- Can be used for difficult cleaning conditions

such as the lavatories, showers, biologicalwastewater treatment units etc.


PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

DESCALER LIQUID 555 is a concentrated,non - volatile, acid based, aqueous solution con-sisting of wetting agents, corrosion inhibitors,powerful descalers and a color indicator.

Appearance / Color : Clear, red liquidSpecific gravity : 1.16/15°CSolubility : AppreciablepH (1% Solution) : 0-1Odor : Pungent

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

DESCALER LIQUID 555 must be used dilutedat a proportion of 1 litre for every 4-9 liters ofwater. Dilution must not exceed this proportionas it may alter the inhibiting effect of the solu-tion.Note that after the application of DESCALERLIQUID 555, a 1% solution of ALKALINITYCONTROL must be used to neutralize thetreated surface area.B. Cleaning Procedure

Preparation: Before the application ofDESCALER LIQUID 555, remove Tin, Zinc,and Aluminum. Lead and galvanized parts/components from the surface area to be treated.Additionally, rinsing of the contaminated areais suggested in order to eliminate sludge andother loose deposits.Application: DESCALER LIQUID 555 may beused either at room temperature, or in order toaccomplish quicker results, it can be heated up,but the temperature must be no more than 55°C. The methods used are the circulation, soakingand spreading.Circulation is applicable to boilers, evapora-tors, condensers, heat exchangers and generallyclosed systems that have the capability to circu-late at a temperature of approximately 45-55°C,for 6-15 hours with the solution of 10-40% ofDESCALER LIQUID 555 in water. Keep inmind that the strength of the solution is analo-gous to the degree of contamination/accumula-tion.Soaking is usually applicable in open or closedsystems that do not provide circulation. In these

86

MAINTENANCE

cases, two or three cleaning trials are recom-mended beforehand. Generally, a solution of20%, at 45-55°C, should be used; it must notstand still, and should have periodic agitation.This ensures constant reaction rate. At the sametime we must maintain the strength of thedesired acidity by adding DESCALER LIQUID555 and fresh water, periodically, in order tomake up for the lost volume proportion due tosteam loss and surface reaction. Spreading is applicable for general cleaninguse on large surface areas, by conventionalmeans such as a brush, sponge or a mop with

DESCALER LIQUID 555 either diluted or not,depending on the degree of contamination andthe kind or type of deposition.After the completion of the cleaning process,regardless of the method used, rinse with plentyof water and neutralize (only for the metal sur-face areas) with 1% solution of ALKALINITYCONTROL. Note that during application inflammable and/or toxic gases may be liberated.In this case, adequate ventilation is necessary.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




87MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

DESCALER POWDER™

DESCRIPTION

DESCALER POWDER is an advanced acidconcentrated dry powder formula consisting ofa blend of specific acids, wetting agents, corro-sion inhibitors, antifoam agents and a colorindicator. Its purpose is to remove hard scaleand rust deposits from water boilers, dieselengine cooling systems, condensers, evapora-tors, heat exchangers, pipeline collection sys-tems, etc.DESCALER POWDER is similar toDESCALER LIQUID 555 as to its propertiesand range of applications. However, the differ-ence lies over the fact that DESCALER POW-DER is a dry powder formula, which makes iteasy and safe to handle and store in awkwardconditions. Furthermore, DESCALER POW-DER is safe to use on sensitive metals and theiralloys such as Zinc, Lead, Aluminum, Tin etc.


- Highly effective for the complete removal ofrust and scale deposits from water boilers,engine cooling systems and other water pro-cessing units and installations, due to its wet-ting agents.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly.- Requires no heating unless its activity is

required to increase drastically.- Due to its strong corrosion inhibitors, it is

applicable to all ferrous metal surfaces andparts, as well as those being galvanized andthose made of Tin, Zinc, Lead, Aluminum etc.

- Contains anti-foaming agents and a colorindicator as a determinant agent of thestrength of the powder.

- Water-soluble, non-flammable, non-volatileand non-hydroscopic.

- Has no known effect on rubber and plasticcompounds.

- May be combined with a specific range of

other products.- Can be used for difficult cleaning conditions

such as the lavatories, showers, biologicalwastewater treatment units etc.

- Cost effective, easy to handle, apply andstore.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

DESCALER POWDER is a concentrated,highly acidic powder compound containing ablend of strong acids, wetting agents, corrosioninhibitors, anti-foam agents and a color acidindicator. Appearance / Color : Reddish powderSpecific gravity : 1.25 at 15°CSolubility : Moderate,

slow reactionpH (10% Solution) : 1Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of DESCALER POWDER to beused corresponds to the scale and degree of rustcontamination, the available downtime, thedesired results and the system to be treated.Therefore, the concentration of the appliedsolution must be made after considering theabove parameters. However, DESCALERPOWDER is recommended for use at a quantityproportion of 4-5 kgs for every 100 litres offresh water.B. Preparation

There are certain actions, which must be takenbefore applying DESCALER POWDER. Theseare the following:- Dissolve the powder in fresh water at a con-centration of 4-5%.

88

MAINTENANCE

- Before the application of the solution, rinsethe area to be treated thoroughly with water inorder to eliminate sludge and other loose de-posits.C. Cleaning Procedure

DESCALER POWDER may be used either atroom temperature or heated at no more than60°C in order to increase its activity and reducethe reaction rate. The methods to use are circu-lation, soaking and spreading.Circulation is applicable to boilers, evapora-tors, condensers, heat exchangers and generallyclosed systems that have the capability to circu-late at a temperature of approximately 45-60°C,for 6-15 hours.Soaking is usually applicable in open or closedsystems that do not provide circulation. In thiscase, a solution of 10%, at 45-60°C and in twoor three cleaning trials is suggested. Here, thesolution should not stand idle. This is accom-plished by periodic agitation. This ensures con-

stant reaction rate. At the same time we mustmaintain the strength of the desired acidity byadding DESCALER POWDER and fresh watersolutions, periodically, in order to make up forthe lost volume proportion due to steam lossand surface reaction. Spreading is applicable in general cleaningapplications on large surface areas, by conven-tional means such as a brush, sponge or a mopwith DESCALER POWDER solutions at con-centrations that depend on the degree of con-tamination and the kind or type of deposition.After the completion of the cleaning process,regardless of the method used, rinse with plentyof water and neutralize (only for the metal sur-face areas) with 1% solution of ALKALINITYCONTROL.

Note that during application, due to the dissolv-ing of the scale deposits, inflammable and /ortoxic gases may be liberated. In this case, ade-quate ventilation is necessary.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




89MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

ELECTROCLEAN A QUICK DRY is a con-centrated, chlorinated dry solvent liquid solu-tion designed to use as an oil, grease and car-bonaceous deposits remover for electrical partsand equipment. It provides immediate and effi-cient removal with a high evaporation rate.


- Removes and carries all kinds of oil, greaseand carbonaceous deposits from major electri-cal parts and motor equipment.

- Non-flammable, non-corrosive and non-con-ductive.

- May be used with a specific range of prod-ucts.

- Can be safely used on painted or varnishedmetal surfaces.

- No need to be rinse off after it has beenapplied.

- Leaves no stains or dry dirt behind.- Cost effective, easy to apply and ready to use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

ELECTROCLEAN A QUICK DRY is a blendof vaporous, volatile chlorinated solvent andpowerful degreasers, non-flammable, non-cor-rosive and non-conductive.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 1.25-1.35/15°CFlash Point : >100°CVapor Density : Heavier than airStability : Very stable under

standard, normalconditions

Odor : Ethereal

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of ELECTROCLEAN A QUICKDRY to be used is not specified due to the vari-ations in its application and the specificsinvolved with isolated cases. Therefore, theoperator/user is the one to judge the quantityneeded depending on the degree of cleaningrequired in that particular case.B. Cleaning Procedure

Once the quantity of ELECTROCLEAN AQUICK DRY has been determined, apply tocontaminated parts/equipment by brushingand/or wiping with a piece of thick cloth. Allapplications must be carried out in areas that areproperly ventilated; this is due to the nature ofthe product. Note that, after use, the product must always bewell sealed in its metallic drum.

ELECTROCLEAN A QUICK DRY™

MAINTENANCE

90

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




91MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

ELECTROCLEAN B™

DESCRIPTION

ELECTROCLEAN B is a special blend of chlo-rinated and powerful degreasing solvents for-mulated to remove grease, oil, carbon depositsand other residues from electric parts andequipment without damaging painted or var-nished metal surfaces, insulating materials andcables. Compared to ELECTROCLEAN AQUICK DRY it has slower evaporation rate.


- Removes completely oil, grease, carbona-ceous and various deposits leaving no dry dirtor stains behind.

- Non-corrosive and non-conductive. - Can be used with a specific range of products. - Safe to use on painted or varnished metal sur-

faces.- A controlled evaporation rate gives efficient

cleaning results as opposed to slow drying so-lutions.

- No need to be rinse off after it has been ap-plied.

- Strong antistatic capabilities result in the re-pulsion of suspended solids in the air such asdust, fumes and dirt.

- Preserves and maintains electrical equipmentin its original state.

- Cost effective, easy to apply and ready to use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

ELECTROCLEAN B is a vaporous, volatile,concentrated product of low flammability, non-corrosive and non-conductive with controlledevaporation rate.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 1.20/15°CFlash Point : > 100ºCStability : StableVapor Density : Heavier than airOdor : Ethereal

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

ELECTROCLEAN B must be applied concen-trated at a quantity needed to accomplish com-plete cleaning; this depends on the degree ofcontamination to the parts/equipment.Therefore, the operator/user is the one to judgethe quantity needed depending on the degree ofcleaning required in that particular case. B. Cleaning Procedure

Once the quantity of ELECTROCLEAN B hasbeen determined, apply to contaminatedparts/equipment by brushing, wiping or by im-mersion (for small parts). All applications mustbe carried out in areas that are properly venti-lated; this is due to the nature of the product. Note that after use, the product must always bewell sealed in its metallic drum.

92

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




93MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

ELECTROCLEAN SUPERFAST™

DESCRIPTION

ELECTROCLEAN SUPERFAST is an innova-tive heavy duty, powerful formula designedfrom specific solvents to quickly attack andpenetrate oil, grease and carbon deposits. Ittreats all electrical parts and equipment withouthurting insulated materials, paints or varnisheson metal surface areas. Compared to ELEC-TROCLEAN A QUICK DRY and ELECTRO-CLEAN B, ELECTROCLEAN SUPERFASThas very high rate of evaporation, while stillbeing safe to apply to all metals and their alloys,as well as to electrical motors and equipment.


- Removes completely oil, grease, carbona-ceous and various deposits leaving no dry dirtor stains behind.

- Evaporates at a high rate providing effectiveand thorough cleaning.

- Non-flammable, non-corrosive and non-con-ductive

- May be used with a specific range of prod-ucts.

- Can be safely used on painted or varnishedmetal surfaces.

- No need to be rinse off after it has beenapplied.

- Strong antistatic capabilities result in therepulsion of suspended solids in the air suchas dust, fumes and dirt.

- Preserves and maintains electrical equipmentin its original state.

- Cost effective, easy to apply and ready to use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

ELECTROCLEAN SUPERFAST is a chlori-nated concentrated solution non-flammable,non-corrosive and non-conductive with highevaporation rate.

Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 1.45-1.50/15°CFlash Point : >100°COdor : EtherealStability : Very stable

under normal,standard conditions

Vapor Density : Heavier than water

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of ELECTROCLEAN SUPER-FAST to be used is directly determined by theuser who must decide on the degree of cleaningneeded; generally this will depend on thedegree of contamination/deposition.B. Cleaning Procedure

The application of ELECTROCLEAN SUPER-FAST can be done by brushing, wiping or byimmersion (for small parts), under proper ven-tilated conditions, this is due to the nature of theproduct.


- ELECTROCLEAN SUPERFAST must al-ways be used undiluted.

- After application, certain types of rubber andplastic compounds may be affected.

- All methods of application should be con-ducted in well ventilated areas.

- After use, ELECTROCLEAN SUPERFASTmust always be kept well sealed in its metal-lic drum.

94

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




95MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

FILTER CLEANER™

DESCRIPTION

FILTER CLEANER is a special product formu-lated by strong emulsifying agents, surfactantsand powerful solvents to treat metal and ceram-ic oil filters, which suffer from oil depositions,carbonized oil accumulation and sludge.


- Non-corrosive and safe to use in all types andkinds of filters.

- Preserves, protects and maintains the opera-tional capabilities of the filter by thoroughand complete cleaning.

- Provides quick and efficient action.- Its pure, high quality components readily

remove oil and grease deposits, even whendry.


- Safe to use on all metals and their alloys aswell as those with inorganic clay finishes.

- Attacks and dissolves water/oil emulsions andconcentrations.


PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

FILTER CLEANER is a concentratedpetroleum solvent based liquid mixture, non-corrosive with strong emulsifying agents andsurfactants.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CFlash Point : > 40°COdor : Aromatic solvent

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of FILTER CLEANER to be useddepends on two factors: the volumetric capacityof the filter to be cleaned and the degree ofdeposition/contamination in the filter.In the first case, the dosage must equal the filtercapacity.In the second case, the dosage must be corre-sponding to the desired degree of cleaning. B. Cleaning Procedure

The application of FILTER CLEANER is doneby the circulation or immersion method. If using the circulation method, determine thefilter capacity and circulate at a constant rate for6-20 hours.If using the immersion method, let the filtersoak in enough quantity of FILTERCLEANER, analogous to the degree of contam-ination, for a time of 6-20 hours.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

FILTER CLEANER must be used undiluted atall times and when using the immersionmethod, periodic agitation with the assistanceof air is necessary, so that a constant surfacereaction is maintained.

96

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




97MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

FOAM PLUS is a concentrated water based andwater soluble, newly developed product, whichcan be used as an additive in all alkaline waterbased cleaning chemicals. This enables thecleaning duration and the penetration of thetreated surface to be adequately enhanced. Theresults being, increased chemical competenceand cost effectiveness.


- Compatible to use with all alkaline waterbased cleaning chemicals.

- A liquid mixture that is water-soluble, non-flammable and biodegradable.

- No effect on rubber or plastic compounds. - Retains chemical cleaning applications on

treated surfaces.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

FOAM PLUS is a concentrated, semi-viscousproduct.Appearance / Color : Yellow liquidOdor : OdorlessSpecific gravity : 1.10-1.15/15°CSolubility : CompletepH : 8 (at 20°C)

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

FOAM PLUS must be used in quantities pro-portional, to the tank surface area that is to becovered, the extent of the contamination, theavailable downtime and the application methodbeing used. Therefore, various concentrated

solutions can be tried and tested, in order toobtain the optimal amount for the job in hand.In general, 50-100 ml of FOAM PLUS is ade-quate per 10 litres of washing solution.B. Use

FOAM PLUS may be used in aqueous solutionswith alkaline cleaning chemicals so that duringthe application procedure, as described in theindividual catalog sheets of each cleaningchemical, the final product is applied in theform of foam by a high pressure machine or aregular air powered paint-spray thick nozzleunit.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

Operators must consult the Safety and Handlinginstructions table before using FOAM PLUS.

MAINTENANCE

FOAM PLUS™

98

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




99MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

GENERAL CLEANING AND SOLVENT™

DESCRIPTION

GENERAL CLEANING AND SOLVENT is amulti purpose cleaner and dispersant, designedto attack, penetrate and remove oil, dirt, dust,stains and organic deposits from large and smallsurface areas. It is an innovative, water soluble,biodegradable liquid product, pH buffered, for-mulated with strong wetting and cleaningagents.ADVANTAGES AND CHARACTERISTICS

- Suitable for a wide range of industrial andmarine cleaning applications such as toilets,bathing rooms, windows, floors, carpets, stor-age rooms, crew accommodations, etc.

- Safe to use, even with bear hands, actsquickly and efficiently.

- Can be used with a wide range of other prod-ucts.

- A water base product where no drying time isrequired.

- Non-flammable, pH buffered, non-corrosiveand non-toxic.

- Bad odor eliminator with its strong but pleas-ant scent.

- Has biocide properties and can be easilyrinsed with water.

- Completely biodegradable.- 100% soluble in fresh or seawater.- Cleans thoroughly leaving no films or stains

behind.- Cost effective, easy to handle and apply.During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by the Interna-tional Maritime Organisation (IMO). GENERAL CLEANING & SOLVENT wasevaluated through IMO's Working Group on theEvaluation of Safety and Pollution Hazards ofChemicals (ESPH Working Group) and foundto meet the requirements of paragraph 1.8.2 ofthe P&A Standards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

GENERAL CLEANING AND SOLVENT is aconcentrated, biodegradable liquid aqueoussolution consisting of emulsifying, wetting andcleaning agents, pH stubilized. Furthermore, itis non-flammable, non-corrosive and non-toxic. Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 1.00/15°CFlash Point : NonepH : 6Odor : Mild, characteristic

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The recommended proportion of GENERALCLEANING AND SOLVENT to be used is 1litre for every 3-4 litres of water. In cases ofextreme soiling and where hard cleaning isrequired, GENERAL CLEANING AND SOL-VENT should be used undiluted, to achievemaximum resultsB. Cleaning Procedure

GENERAL CLEANING AND SOLVENT maybe applied by conventional methods such as abrush, sponge, or a mop. When any conventional method is used, 1 litreof solution will approximately cover 8-12 sq.m. of surface area always in cases of normalcontamination. In any case, after the application of GENERALCLEANING AND SOLVENT on any surfacearea, a time period of 2-6 hours is feasible forthat area to be left to dry completely.

100

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




101MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

HAND CLEANER is a multi-purpose heavyduty cleaning gel mixture used by commercialand industrial companies as a common dirt andgrease remover. Its powerful formula ensuresquick and thorough cleaning after any mechan-ical process where the engineer has been manu-ally involved. Its content of cosmetic cleaners,safe degreasers, heavy duty detergent agentsand light stone micro granules make HANDCLEANER one of the most effective and safeproducts on the market.


- Highly effective at general-purpose handcleaning/degreasing.

- Safe to use and apply even in the most sensi-tive cases.

- Removes all known kinds of dirt.- Acts as a bacteria controller and eliminates

odors.- Can be used daily.- Non corrosive, non toxic, non flammable and

non oxidizing.- pH stabilized, thus it acts as an acid and alkali

neutralizing agent. - May be combined with a specific range of

products.- Easy to rinse off as water soluble.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

HAND CLEANER is a concentrated paste,blended with detergent agents, cosmetic clean-ers, degreasers and light stone micro granules.It is also pH stabilized.Appearance / Color : Light orange gelSpecific gravity : 0.90-1.00/15°CpH (1% Solution) : 7Solubility : AppreciableOdor : Lemon scent

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container830116 5 Plastic pail

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of HAND CLEANER to be useddepends on the degree of contamination alongwith the desired degree of cleaning by the engi-neer. Thus, under normal conditions a smallquantity of 5-10 grs is sufficient to apply. In dif-ficult cases, bigger quantities may be requiredand repetition of the cleaning procedure mightalso be necessary. B. Cleaning Procedure

HAND CLEANER is applied in its originalform. Once the quantity is determined, theengineer must rinse off his hands with water soas the chunk deposits are removed beforehand.Thereafter, hand cleaner is applied and the vig-orous rubbing of the hands is necessary toaccomplish deep and thorough dirt penetration.When a couple of minutes have elapsed, theengineer must rinse off with plenty of water andwipe dry with a towel. The cleaning procedurecan be repeated if necessary. Note that handcleaning may be assisted by the use of a brushand/or a sponge.

MAINTENANCE

HAND CLEANER™

102

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




103MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

LIQUID SOAP™

DESCRIPTION

LIQUID SOAP is a multi-purpose heavy dutycleaning soap solution used as a common dirtremover in commercial and industrial cleaningprocesses. It may also be used to clean effi-ciently large surface areas and cargo tanks fromanimal oil, vegetable oil, fish oil, fat and waxes.


- Very effective general-purpose soap cleaner.- Can be applied on all sensitive metal surfaces

(Tin, Lead, Zinc and Aluminum) and theiralloys as well as galvanized metals.

- Ideal for use in the cleaning of animal oil,vegetable oil, fish oil, fat and wax deposits.

- Acts as a bacteria controller.- pH stabilized, thus acts as a neutralizing

agent.- May be combined with a specific range of

products.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

LIQUID SOAP is an aqueous concentrated liq-uid soap solution, able to control pH and bacte-ria growth.Appearance / Color : Light yellow,

viscous liquidSpecific gravity : 0.90-1.00/15°CpH (1% Solution) : 7Solubility : AppreciableOdor : Lemon scent

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of LIQUID SOAP to be useddepends on the degree of contamination to theaffected area in question, along with the desireddegree of cleaning required by the user. Thus, incases of extreme soiling and heavy contamina-tion LIQUID SOAP must be used undiluted,where as in less extreme situations it may bediluted to a concentration, appropriate for thedeposited accumulation.


LIQUID SOAP may be applied undiluted ordissolved in water by injection and/or circula-tion, when required. In simple cleaning proce-dures it can be used like any other common liq-uid soap with conventional ways such as abrush, sponge and/or a mop.

104

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




105MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT is thenew, 3rd generation dispersant, approved asType II and Type III from the Greek GeneralChemical State Laboratory. It can be used con-centrated or diluted to a ratio of 1:10 dependingon the contamination level. It is an efficient andenvironmental friendly product containing nohydrocarbons. It has been specifically designedfor oil dispersion at sea, at shore and in port,either on-or-off board.


- Non toxic to marine life.- Converts oil spills to hydrophilic droplets that

are easily biodegradable.- Minimizes environmental damage.- Does not contribute further to pollution.- Cost effective and economical.- Easy to handle and apply. - Applicable to mineral oils, crude oils, fuel

oils, kerosene, white spirit and lubricant oils.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT is alow viscosity liquid product containing surface-active wetting agents combined with abiodegradable oil-soluble, non-ionic emulsify-ing agent.

Appearance / Color : Yellow liquidDensity (g/ml) : 1.00-1.05/20°COdor : Characteristic

ether - like odorFlash Point : 90°CpH : 7

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container832076 30 Plastic jerrican832176 210 Plastic drum

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

At Sea: The quantity of OIL SPILL DISPER-SANT to be used depends on three main fac-tors: the quantity of oil spilled, the type of oilspilled and the weather conditions (prevailingand forthcoming). However, experience andexpertise have proved that an adequate volumeof MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT tobe used is 1 litre per 15 -20 square meters (1gallon per 75-100 square yards) as tested on aspillage of Kuwait crude oil.At Shore: The quantity of OIL SPILL DISPER-SANT demanded in this case, depends on thesize of contamination in the affected area.Repetition of the cleaning process may be nec-essary, until oil-spill elimination is complete.On Ship: Follow the Procedure as perParagraph "At Shore". B. Cleaning Procedure

At Sea:1. Determine the oil-spillage size and kind.2. Prepare the tools necessary to apply the prod-

uct, undiluted, as specified, using theMarichem Oil Clean Kit equipment.

3. Spray the required quantity of the product,with the appropriate spraying equipment, overthe oil spill.

4. Wait for a few minutes until oil spill hasemulsified.

5. In the case of a persistent/stubborn oil spill,repeat cleaning process until oil spill elimina-tion is complete.

IMPORTANT: Emulsification occurs whenthe MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT,the spilled oil and seawater are mixed.At Shore:1. Follow steps 1, 2, 3 as described in part At

Sea.2. Let it soak for a few minutes and remove

from the treated area.

MAINTENANCE

MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT™

106

3. Rinse thoroughly by applying high pressurewater source and collect residual usingMARICHEM OIL SPILL KIT.

4. Repeat cleaning of contaminated area if nec-essary.

On Ship:1. Follow steps 1, 2, 3 as described in part At

Sea.2. After spraying and/or pouring, mix thor-

oughly using a brush, mop, sponge or anyother stirring device feasible to move withrapid and irregular action.

3. Pour water over the treated surface and mixvigorously.

4. Rinse thoroughly by applying high-pressurewater source.

5. Repeat cleaning if necessary.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

The crew that will perform the oil spill disper-sion must take all the precautionary measure-ments required before the beginning of the pro-cess.


ToxicityAccording to the European Union (EU) laws,the MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT isin the class of chemical dispersants that fulfillthe limits of non-toxicity for a chemical disper-sant substance. The lethal concentration 50 (LC50) for aquatic microorganisms has been testedand found to be equal to 0.03%, after 24 hoursof exposure. This value is within the acceptablelimits of non-toxicity from EU directives.

The test for non-toxicity has been performed inthe laboratories of the Greek Institute ofOceanographic and Fishing Research of theMinistry of Research and Technology, whichare the official governmental laboratories fornon-toxicity tests.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

MARICHEM MARIGASES WorldwideServices has won the 2004 Seatrade DubaiInternational Maritime Award in the categoryCountering Marine and AtmosphericPollution for the technical excellence ofMARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

107MARICHEM®


®MMMM

SAFETY AND HANDLING




109MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

MARICLEAN DG-25 is a high performancewater based alkaline cleaning agent. It is aproduct of low toxicity that does not containeither nonyl phenols or caustic alkalis. It con-sists of biodegradable ingredients safe for oilcleaning and metal degreasing.MARICLEAN DG-25 can be used as a cleaningagent for engine rooms, decks, cargo holds oreven as a tank cleaner. It efficiently removesheavy grease, sludge, fatty oil, fish oil, animaland vegetable oil. MARICLEAN DG-25 can beused neat or diluted with fresh water. It is read-ily biodegradable after use.


- Multi-purpose water based cleaner.- Consists of biodegradable ingredients.- Does not contain nonyl phenols neither caus-

tic alkalis.- Free from hydrocarbons and chlorinated sol-

vents.- Non flammable and non combustible liquid of

low toxicity.- Can be used for a variety of general cleaning,

such as removal of grease, oil, sludge andgrime.

- Can be used efficiently as cleaning agent forengine rooms, decks, cargo holds and tanks.

- No known effect on rubber.- Applicable to plastic, rubber and epoxy com-

pounds as well to painted, coated and var-nished surfaces.

- If you are using MARICLEAN DG-25 on avertical or horizontal surface, the residenttime and cleaning ability can be furthered, byadding MARICHEM Foam Plus.

- May attack aluminium and zinc.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). MARICLEAN DG - 25 was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MARICLEAN DG-25 is a water based alkalinecleaner containing specific eco-friendly sol-vents, non ionic and anionic surface activeagents and corrosion inhibitors.Appearance/Color : Pale/Yellow LiquidOdor : Ethereal OdorSpecific Gravity : 1.05/150°CpH : 11Flash Point : NoneSolubility : Completely Soluble

in water Compatibility : May attack Aluminium

and Zinc when usedin a high concentratedsolution.

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

MARICLEAN DG-25 may be applied concen-trated or diluted with water. The quantity to beused is proportional to the degree of contamina-tion, the available downtime, the surface area tobe covered and the desired degree of cleaning.For heavy duty cleaning and degreasing, MAR-ICLEAN DG-25 can be used undiluted where-

MAINTENANCE

MARICLEAN DG-25™

110

as for lighter contamination can be used dilutedwith water depending on the degree and natureof the contamination.Circulation method: A solution of 5%-10%must be prepared by diluting MARICLEANDG-25 with water.Injection method: Prepare a solution of 3%-6%by diluting MARICLEAN DG-25 with water.B. Cleaning Procedure

Circulation method: After the solution is pre-pared, apply by circulating for approximately 6-8 hours. Thereon, wash thoroughly with water.You may have to repeat the procedure, in casesof heavy contamination.

Injection method: When the prescribed solu-tion is prepared, inject directly to the contami-nated area. Afterwards, rinse thoroughly withwater. Soaking/Immersion method: Once the solutionis prepared, immerse the part, component orunit to be cleaned and leave it to soak for about30 minutes, making sure that all the surfaces re-main covered in solution. Afterwards rinse thor-oughly with water.

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




111MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

MUD CONDITIONER™

DESCRIPTION

MUD CONDITIONER is a concentrated liquidsolution formulated with a high molecularweight polymer component, special surfactantsand a corrosion inhibitor in order to fight for-mations and disperse accumulations of mud andsilt in ballast water tanks. Actually, MUD CON-DITIONER reacts with mud and silt to formlarge non-adhering particles, which are dis-solved in the tank and then discharged with theballast water during de-ballasting.


- Ideal for the removal, dispersion and preven-tion of heavy mud, loose scale, rust deposits,silt accumulates and other sediments in ballastwater tanks.

- Reacts with mud and silt molecules to formnon-adhering particles, which are easily dis-charged during de-ballasting.

- Terminates microorganisms harvested in themud and silt sludge.

- Effectively cleans the ballast water tank linesand pumping equipment.

- Prevents extensive erosion from the ballasttank surfaces and cavities.

- Acts quickly and efficiently and is water-sol-uble

- Non-flammable and non-toxic.- Can safely be applied to all metals except

those galvanized and those made of tin, zincand aluminum.


PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MUD CONDITIONER is a concentrated aque-ous solution consisting of a high molecularweight component, special surface-activeagents and a specific corrosion inhibitor.

Appearance / Color : Clear, red liquid.Specific gravity : 1.15-1.20/15°CSolubility : CompletepH : 1-2Odor : Characteristic

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Commonly, a quantity of 25-50 litres of MUDCONDITIONER per 1000 tons of ballast watercontent is used every time the tanks are bal-lasted. However, when we deal with heavy mudand silt accumulations, 150-250 litres per 1000tons of ballast water is recommended for fastand complete cleaning.B. Cleaning Procedure

In the case where regular treatment is desired,the prescribed quantity of MUD CONDITION-ER is added to ballast water, while ballasting, inorder to make sure of the homogeneity of theformed mixture. Here, the treatment must be re-peated every time the tanks are ballasted.In the case of heavy mud and silt accumulation,the quantity of MUD CONDITIONER pre-scribed is poured in the de-ballasted tanks,which now are filled only with 20-30 cm oftheir height capacity with water, being enoughto ensure mud and silt removal by rapid agita-tion. Then, the mixture must be left to act for aperiod of 3-5 hours followed by complete re-moval. Note that a high-pressure water supply may beused to assist removal and further penetrationinto the mud and silt deposits.Also, the treatment may have to be repeated de-pending on the degree of contamination and ac-cumulation we are dealing with.

112

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




113MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

OIL AND GREASE REMOVER HD 999™

DESCRIPTION

OIL AND GREASE REMOVER HD 999 is apowerful solvent-based emulsifying liquidproduct designed to attack, penetrate andremove mineral oil, lube oil, fuel oil, diesel oil,grease, fats, soot, asphalt and light carbon stainsfrom any metal surfaces. It is also applicable toplastic, rubber, epoxy and zinc compounds, aswell as to painted, coated and varnished sur-faces.ADVANTAGES AND CHARACTERISTICS

- Effectively disperses all kinds and types ofoil, grease, fat and light carbonaceous de-posits from metal, plastic and rubber surfacesand parts.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly, even with quickrinsing.

- Non-corrosive, non-toxic, non-chlorinatedemulsifier.

- Applicable to plastic, rubber, epoxy and zinccompounds as well as to painted coated andvarnished surfaces.


- Forms a milky-white emulsion upon contactwith water.



OIL AND GREASE REMOVER HD 999 wasevaluated through IMO's Working Group on theEvaluation of Safety and Pollution Hazards ofChemicals (ESPH Working Group) and foundto meet the requirements of paragraph 1.8.2 ofthe P&A Standards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

OIL AND GREASE REMOVER HD 999 is asolvent based liquid solution that containsaliphatic solvents, non-ionic surface-activeagents, emulsifying agents and concentratedconstituents.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 0.80/20°CFlash Point : > 40°COdor : Slight aromaticStability : Very Stable

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

OIL AND GREASE REMOVER HD 999 maybe applied in its concentrated state at room tem-perature or in solutions with gas oil of 6-12%and maximum temperature of 60°C.The quantity to be applied varies according tothe degree of deposition or contamination of thesubject in question. Therefore, the user is theone to consider the quantity necessary depend-ing on the degree of cleaning desired, the downtime period and the degree of accumulation.B. Cleaning Procedure

Once the quantity has been determined, applyusing any of the following methods: brushingand soaking/immersion. Brushing is applicable to situations with lightaccumulation, large and small surface areas andhighly contaminated parts or engine compo-nents. Soaking/Immersion is used in situations wherewe deal with dismantled parts, articles andengine components. Here, brushing may be

114

applied in coordination with immersion toremove heavy accumulation. After the applica-tion, no matter which method is used, leave thesolution to soak for as long as necessary andrinse with fresh water (in some cases, a highpressure water supply is recommended).

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




115MARICHEM®


®MMMM MAINTENANCE

OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER™

DESCRIPTION

OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER is a product of supe-rior quality, specifically designed for oil disper-sion at sea, at shore and in port either on-boardor off-board. High standards and specificationshave been incorporated to engineer this envi-ronmentally safe product.


- Non-toxic to marine life.- Highly effective for oil spills at sea, on

seashores and on solid surfaces such as docks,decks, piers, wharfs, ship hulls etc.

- Actively promotes oil-dispersion into micro-scopic droplets, so that the maximum surfacearea can be treated with rapid bacterial degra-dation.

- Has been tested and approved by the variousregulatory agencies.

- Cost effective and economical.- Applicable to all mineral oils, crude oils, fuel

oils, kerosene, white spirit and lubricant oils.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER is a low viscosityliquid product containing surface active wettingagents and hydrocarbon solvents of very lowtoxicity, combined with a biodegradable oil-sol-uble, non-ionic emulsifying agent.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidOdor : OdorlessDensity g/ml at 20°C : 0.804Flash point : 85°CAromatics : < 0.4%

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

At Sea: The quantity of OIL SPILL EMULSI-FIER to be used depends on three main factors:the quantity of oil spilled, the type of oil spilledand the weather conditions (prevailing andforthcoming). However, experience and exper-tise have proved that an adequate volume ofMARICHEM OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER to beused is 1 litre per 15 -20 square meters (1 gal-lon per 75 - 100 square yards) as tested on aspillage of Kuwait crude oil.At Shore: The quantity of OIL SPILL EMUL-SIFIER demanded in this case, depends on thesize of contamination in the affected area.Repetition of the cleaning process may be nec-essary, until oil-spill elimination is complete.On Ship: The quantity of OIL SPILL EMUL-SIFIER required here, is analogous to the caseof shore contamination. That is, the applicationof the cleaning process should be carried out onthe contaminated surface, as many times, as isrequired.B. Cleaning Procedure

At Sea: 1. Determine the size and kind of oil-spillage. 2. Prepare the tools necessary to apply the prod-uct, undiluted, as specified using the MarichemOil Clean Kit equipment. 3. Spray the desired quantity of the productwith the appropriate spraying equipment, overthe oil spill.4. Wait for a few minutes until oil spill hasemulsified. 5. Is important to keep in mind that emulsifica-tion occurs when the Oil Spill Emulsifier, thespilled oil and seawater are mixed. 6. In the case of a persistent/stubborn oil spill,repeat cleaning process until oil spill elimina-tion is complete.

116

MAINTENANCE

At Shore: 1. Follow steps 1,2,3 as described in part "AtSea". 2. Let it soak for a few minutes and removefrom the treated area. 3. Rinse thoroughly by applying high pressurewater source.4. Repeat cleaning of contaminated area if nec-essary.On Ship: 1. Follow steps 1,2,3, as described in part "AtSea". 2. After spraying and/or pouring, mix thorough-ly using a brush, mop, sponge or any other stir-ring device feasible to move with rapid and ir-regular action. 3. Pour water over the treated surface and mixvigorously. 4. Rinse thoroughly by applying high pressurewater source. 5. Repeat cleaning if necessary.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

The crew that will perform the oil spill disper-sion must take all the precautionary measure-ments required before the beginning of the pro-cess.


A. Toxicity

The following test results justify the OIL SPILLEMULSIFIER to be of low toxicity to marinelife:

B. Tests and Licenses

OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER has been tested byEFFEH and Associates Research AnalysisConsultation (Houston, Texas) and has beenfound to be non-toxic to microbes. OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER has been tested andlicensed by the official agencies of Greece andHong Kong, which are the Greek Institute ofOceanographic and Fishing Research of theMinistry of Research and Technology and theEnvironmental Protection Department of HongKong, respectively. Furthermore, it has beentested and approved for use by China's regula-tory agencies; The Tsing Tao City Analyticaland Testing Society and Tsing Tao University ofOceanography, while it is subject to be official-ly licensed by the Tsing Tao Safety SupervisionBureau.


In year 2000, MARICHEM MARIGASESWorldwide Services has been awarded bySEATRADE ORGANISATION in the catego-ry Countering Marine Pollution for its revo-lutionary MARICHEM OIL SPILL EMULSI-FIER.

Test Object Exposure Time (hrs)

LC 50 (mg/l)

Brown Shrimp A (Crangon Crangon) 48 3300

Brown Shrimp B (Crangon Crangon) 96 3300-10000

Limpet (C) 24 75000

MAINTENANCE

117MARICHEM®


®MMMM

SAFETY AND HANDLING




119MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

PASSIVATION LIQUID is an innovative, con-centrated liquid product specifically engineeredto passivate pickled installations and tank sur-face areas made of austenitic stainless steel. Itprovides a protective oxide layer against corro-sion contamination. Furthermore, when it isdiluted with water, it can be safely used to cleanaluminum surfaces, aluminum parts and theirmetal alloy compounds.ADVANTAGES AND CHARACTERISTICS

- Efficiently binds to pickled austenitic stain-less steel surfaces to deactivate erosive condi-tions and to protect against further corrosion.

- Can safely be used to clean aluminum instal-lations, parts and surface areas when dilutedwith water.

- Provides a quick and thorough treatment.- Cannot be used until after the pickling pro-

cess.- Non-flammable, non-conductive and non-tox-

ic.- Has no known effect on rubber or plastic.- May be combined with a specific range of

other products.- No heating is required upon application and it

is water-soluble.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

PASSIVATION LIQUID is an aqueous concen-trated liquid blend of strong acids, non-ionicsurface-active agents and advanced corrosioninhibitors.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquid.Specific gravity : 1.20/15°CSolubility : AppreciablepH (1% Solution) : 1Odor : Characteristic

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

Stainless Steel Treatment: For this application,PASSIVATION LIQUID must be used undi-luted in quantities proportional to cover the sur-face areas or installations under treatment. Notethat 1 litre of the product may cover approxi-mately an area of 12 sq. meters.Aluminum Cleaning: Here, PASSIVATIONLIQUID may be diluted to a 1:1 proportionwith water. The quantity necessary correspondsto the area to be covered, the degree of contam-ination, the available down time and the desireddegree of cleaning.B. Procedure

Stainless Steel Treatment: PASSIVATIONLIQUID may be applied by conventional meansor by the circulation method.Conventional methods such as a brush, hardsponge and/or a thick mop can be used whenstainless steel parts and/or components are to betreated. Application should be carried out forapproximately 15 minutes. Afterwards, rinsethoroughly with distilled water and leave to dry.Circulation is a method commonly used forpipeline systems and tanks. Here the system un-der consideration must be filled with PASSIVA-TION LIQUID, which must be circulated forapproximately 2 hours. Then, the system mustbe drained and rinsed thoroughly with distilledwater. Afterwards, leave the system to dry. Notethat before discarding the liquid, it should beneutralized with slaked lime.Aluminum Cleaning: For the cleaning of alu-minum surfaces, pipe systems and parts, any ofthe cleaning methods for stainless steel, asdescribed above, can be used. The cleaning

MAINTENANCE

PASSIVATION LIQUID™

120

MAINTENANCE

time is approximately for 2 hours. Afterwards,rinse thoroughly with water. Note that, neutral-ization with slaked lime before draining is alsoapplicable in circulation cleaning processes.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




121MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

PICKLING LIQUID is a concentrated liquidsolution formulated with a blend of specificacids, surfactants and corrosion inhibitors. Itspurpose is to attack, penetrate and remove weldslag, annealing scale, grinding dust fromaustenitic stainless steel constructions such astanks, installations and components before theprocess of passivation.


- Efficiently removes foreign substances fromaustenitic stainless steel surfaces and articleswhile preparing them for proper passivation.

- Can only be used on austenitic stainless steelas it corrodes other metals.

- Water soluble, acting quickly and thoroughly.- Non-flammable, non-conductive and non-

toxic.- No heating is required upon application.- No known effect on rubber or plastic com-


other products.- Cost effective, easy to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

PICKLING LIQUID is an aqueous concen-trated liquid mixture consisting of specific highquality acids, surface-active agents andadvanced corrosion inhibitors.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquid.Specific gravity : 1.20/15°CSolubility : AppreciablepH (1% Solution) : 1Odor : Characteristic

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

PICKLING LIQUID must be used undilutedand in quantities proportional to the extend ofcontamination you are dealing with, the surfacearea to be covered, the number of articles beingtreated and the type/kind of stainless steel.Anyway, the user is the one responsible todetermine the actual quantity needed for eachsituation at hand.


PICKLING LIQUID may be applied either bythe circulation or the soaking/immersionmethod.However, before application, a pre-treatmentprocess is necessary.Therefore, before commencing, clean anddegrease the surfaces to be pickled with eitherMARICHEM ELECTROCLEAN SUPER-FAST to remove felt pen ink marks, oils andlight carbon deposits or with MARICHEMALCACTIVE LIQUID to remove greasedeposits that have accumulated on smallermetal surfaces and parts. Afterwards, use ahigh-pressure water supply to rinse well.Circulation is a method mainly used for pipesystems. Here, the system is filled with PICK-LING LIQUID, which it must be circulated for2-6 hours depending on the degree of soilingand the type of the austenitic steel. Do notpickle longer than is necessary. Thereafter,drain the system and rinse thoroughly withwater. Passivation must follow immediately.Note that before disposing of the liquid, it mustbe neutralized with slaked lime.

Soaking/Immersion is a method used for parts,components or other articles. The process is ini-tiated by filling a plastic or plastic lined bathwith PICKLING LIQUID.

MAINTENANCE

PICKLING LIQUID™

122

MAINTENANCE

Then, place the articles to be pickled into thebath and leave them to soak for 1-6 hours de-pending on the degree of soiling and the kind ofaustenitic steel. Remove the articles from thebath and spray them with a powerful water jet.Passivation should follow immediately afterspraying.In any case, note that before disposing of theliquid effluent solution, it should be neutralizedwith slaked lime.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




123MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

PICKLING PASTE is a sophisticated, concen-trated light blue thixothropic paste engineeredto attack, penetrate and effectively remove millscale, welding enamels, grinding remnants, ironcontaminants and other lighter deposits comingfrom tanks, installations and articles made ofaustenitic stainless steel, nickel, nickel alloysand copper-nickel alloys, which need to betreated before passivation. Moreover, due to itsunique thixothropic properties, PICKLINGPASTE adheres to all surfaces positioned eithervertically or horizontally thus ensuring thepickling treatment.


- Effectively removes foreign substances, sur-face contaminants and welding deposits fromaustenitic stainless steel, nickel, nickel alloys,and copper-nickel alloy surfaces, installationsand components before the passivation pro-cess.

- Dissolves completely traces of iron contami-nants and all the oxide/hydroxides of iron,nickel and chrome, which have been formedduring the welding process.

- Does not contain chlorides in order to avoidpitting.

- Can be used only on austenitic stainless steel,nickel, nickel alloys and copper-nickel alloysas it corrodes other metals.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly whilst provides100% successful results.

- Non-flammable, non-conductive and non-toxic.

- Water-soluble and no heating is required uponapplication.

- Adheres to all surface areas, vertical or hori-zontal.

- Can be combined with a specific range of oth-er products.

- No known effect on rubber and plastic com-pounds.


PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

PICKLING PASTE is an adherent concentratedthixothropic paste, highly acidic, containingspecific acid compounds, surface-active agents,special corrosion inhibitors and no chloridecompounds.Appearance / Color : Thick, light blue pasteSpecific gravity : 1.10-1.15/15°CSolubility : AppreciablepH (1% Solution) : 1-2

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

PICKLING PASTE must be used undiluted inits natural state. The quantity needed is propor-tional to the degree of contamination, the treat-ment time, the surface area to cover, the numberof the articles for treatment and the type/kind ofthe steel.In any case, the quantity must be sufficient tocover the surface area in question and form athin even coating over it. Thus, the operatormust carefully select the quantity needed, afterconsidering all of the above parameters and thechosen method of application.


Pretreatment: In order to ensure even picklingtreatment, degreasing of small or large surfaceareas must be accomplished by using undilutedMARICHEM ALCACLEAN HD, which mustbe applied with a brush. Then it must be rinsedoff with water and leave the surface to dry.

MAINTENANCE

PICKLING PASTE™

124

MAINTENANCE

Thereafter, the application of PICKLINGPASTE is possible.Application: Before use PICKLING PASTEmust be well mixed by shaking and/or stirring.PICKLING PASTE may be applied by conven-tional means, such as a hard and thick rollbrush, a wide paintbrush, a thick wall broometc.After application, leave the paste to react withthe surface at a temperature of 20°C (room tem-perature) as follows:- Austenitic stainless steel types: 15-60 minutes- Nickel and nickel alloys: 5-20 minutes - Copper-nickel alloys: 5-20 minutes

Note that if the temperature is 10°C below orabove the room temperature, the pickling activ-ity and thus the reaction time changes roughlyby a factor of two (2). If the temperature of thepickling surface is above 40°C, PICKLINGPASTE must not be applied until after it dropsto room temperature.Once the reaction time is completed, PICK-LING PASTE must be rinsed off completelywith a high-pressure water supply. Then, leavethe surface to dry until the passivation processis initiated.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




125MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

PURIFIER DISC CLEANER is a concentratedliquid mixture especially designed to removecarbonaceous deposits from all types of lubeand fuel oil separators and separator discs. It isformulated with powerful solvents, active sur-factants and inorganic acids. Its purpose is toact quickly and efficiently.


- Highly effective in the removal of carbona-ceous deposits from all types of separatorsand separator discs.

- Does not contain any chlorinated hydrocar-bons and is non-flammable.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly and induces cen-trifuge efficiency.

- Safe to use on stainless steel and all ferrousmetals except Tin, Zinc, Aluminum, Lead andthose galvanized.

- Can be applied directly on the contaminatedarea without taking apart the separators and/ortheir disc components.

- May be combined with a specific range ofproducts.


PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

PURIFIER DISC CLEANER is a concentratedblend of non-chlorinated hydrocarbons, surfac-tants and inorganic acids. It is non-flammableand water soluble.

Appearance / Color : Non-Transparent,colorless liquid

Specific gravity : 1.07/15°CpH : 1-2Solubility in water : AbsoluteFlash Point : NoneOdor : Slight etheral

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The suggested proportion of PURIFIER DISCCLEANER is 1 for every 4-8 parts of water.However, the strength of the solution is basedon the degree of cleaning desired for the situa-tion at hand. The factors to be considered arethe build-up of the deposits, the heating condi-tions and the available downtime. These param-eters are important to be acknowledged by theuser who will finally decide on the quantity andthe concentration needed. Note that the higherthe concentration of the solution, the quickerand more efficient is the cleaning.


The use of PURIFIER DISC CLEANER can bedone by immersion of the separator parts. Inthis case you must not use a galvanized con-tainer.Cleaning time may vary from 1 to 3 hoursdepending on the level of contamination.After immersion, remove part/parts and washthoroughly with fresh water in order to rinse offthe PURIFIER DISC CLEANER, left overstains and dissolved deposits.

MAINTENANCE

PURIFIER DISC CLEANER™

126

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




127MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

RUST REMOVER is a concentrated aqueousliquid solution consisting of a blend of syner-getic antioxidants and passivators. It is used toremove rust from any steel surface area and ruststains from brass, copper, stainless steel, wood,ceramic and aluminum surfaces, painted or not.Additionally, it contributes to the rust proofingof metals before any painting or coating appli-cation.ADVANTAGES AND CHARACTERISTICS

- Readily removes rust and rust stains frommetal and non-metal surfaces.

- Protects and keeps surfaces free from corro-sion.

- Removes and prevents flash and light rust dueto passivation.

- Acts as a rust proofing agent before the appli-cation of paints or coatings.

- Non-flammable, does not affect rubber orplastic compounds.

- May be used with a specific range of othercleaning products.


During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO).RUST REMOVER was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet therequirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

RUST REMOVER is a mixture of special acids,passivators and emulsifiers, non-flammable.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquidSpecific gravity : 1.23-1.25/15°C

pH : 1Solubility in water : CompleteOdor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of rust remover to be used cannotbe directly specified, since it depends on thecleaning results desired and the situation athand. The user is the one responsible to regulatethe quantity needed. However, when the clean-ing application is determined, RUSTREMOVER must be used diluted with freshwater with a percentage concentration rangingbetween 10-50% depending on the desiredstrength of the solution. Note that a 10% solu-tion is sufficiently strong can be used for mostgeneral/everyday situations involving rust. The50% solution is recommended when we havevery difficult cases, involving areas that arevery heavily encrusted with rust.B. Cleaning Procedure

Before application, when the affected area hasbeen determined, ensure the absence of oil,grease, dirt or other foreign matter. Then shakethe RUST REMOVER well and prepare thedesired concentration solution. The solutionmay now be applied either by brushing and/orinjection. Smaller parts may be immerseddirectly into the prepared solution. In all of theabove situations, you must allow RUSTREMOVER to act for 20-40 minutes and thenrinse thoroughly with high or regular pressurefresh water. Note that in cases for where RUSTREMOVER has been specifically used to rustproof an area, before it is to be painted orcoated, there is no need to rinse with water.

MAINTENANCE

RUST REMOVER™

128

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




129MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

RUST SHIELD PHOS is a concentrated liquidsolution specifically engineered to attack,remove and prevent corrosion as well as tomaintain anti-corrosive properties thereon. Itmay be applied to all metal surface areas andmetallic components as a preparatory anti-rustagent before painting, varnishing and/or coatingjobs provided that these treated surfaces are freeof water.ADVANTAGES AND CHARACTERISTICS

- Effectively attacks, penetrates, removes andcontrols rust on all metal surfaces and partsexcept those being galvanized and those madeof Tin, Zinc, Aluminum and Lead.

- Protects efficiently against corrosion.- Acts quickly and thoroughly and no heating

upon application is needed.- No known effect on rubber and plastic com-

pounds.- Water-soluble, non-flammable liquid mixture.- Cold protective and "phosphating" rust con-

verter formulated to use on all steel surfacesbefore coating, re-coating, painting and var-nishing applications.

- Substitutes sandblasting and hot picklingmethods, especially in the cases where theycannot be used.

- May be combined with a specific range ofother products.



RUST SHIELD PHOS was evaluated throughIMO's Working Group on the Evaluation ofSafety and Pollution Hazards of Chemicals(ESPH Working Group) and found to meet the

requirements of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&AStandards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

RUST SHIELD PHOS is a concentrated acid-based aqueous solution containing a synergisticantioxidant, and a strong corrosion inhibitor,which result to rust removal and rust proofingon metal surfaces and articles.Appearance / Color : Clear, colorless liquid.Specific gravity : 1.27/15°CSolubility : AdequatePH : 1Odor : Odorless

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of RUST SHIELD PHOS to beused cannot be prescribed, since this dependson the surface area and/or the number of theparts to be treated, the degree of contaminationand the desired results wanted by the user.In any case, RUST SHIELD PHOS must beused diluted at a proportion of 1 liter for every1-2 liters of water.B. Cleaning Procedure

The application of RUST SHIELD PHOS canbe done by brushing with an elongated hardthick brush. 1 litre of the diluted solution willcover 12-15 sq. meters of surface area.After application, leave surface to dry com-pletely for approximately 2-6 hours time.Furthermore, it is important to note that 1 litreof RUST SHIELD PHOS can cover approxi-mately 12-15 sq. meters of light rusted surfaces,where water/sandblasting has been previouslyused.

MAINTENANCE

RUST SHIELD PHOS™

130

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




131MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

SANITATION A - CLEANER is a biologicalactive cleaning solution formulated to eliminatehazardous, toxic bacteria and its growth, as wellas to dissolve and remove solid organic waste,natural oils, grease and tartar deposits. It hasbeen designed for the cleaning of restrooms(toilets), bathrooms, storage rooms, kitchensinks, collection lines and in general, thesewage/sanitary systems of the vessel.Furthermore, its concentrated scent providesthe added advantage of an odor eliminator.


- Effectively eliminates hazardous bacteria andreadily removes organic waste and oil andgrease deposits.

- A multi purpose cleaner for toilets, drains,showers, storage rooms, quarter rooms, etc.

- Unblocks and maintains clearways inpipelines and sewage sanitary systems.

- Odor eliminator.- Acts quickly and efficiently, while being safe

to use.- Can be used in combination with other clean-

ing products.- Does not affect rubber or plastic compounds.- Very cost effective, easy to handle and apply.

During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). SANITATION A - CLEANER was evaluated(as BIOLOGICAL CLEANER) through IMO'sWorking Group on the Evaluation of Safety andPollution Hazards of Chemicals (ESPHWorking Group) and found to meet the require-ments of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&A Standards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

SANITATION A - CLEANER is a concentratedliquid blend containing powerful surfactants,bacterial strains and aqueous chemical cleaners.

Appearance / Color : Clear, light yellowliquid

Specific gravity : 1.09/15°CpH (1% Solution) : 13Odor : Mild chlorine scent

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

SANITATION A - CLEANER may be dosed inquantities sufficient to provide thorough andcomplete cleaning results. The user is the onecapable to regulate the quantity used accordingto the situation at hand.B. Cleaning Procedure

The application of SANITATION A-CLEANER does not differ from other generalcleaners. Therefore, the ways to apply the prod-uct are conventional due to its safe characteris-tics. That is, for floors, walls, counters, etc, usea brush, sponge or mop. For drains, sinks,kitchen pipelines, bathroom pipelines, etc, usedaily by pouring down a quantity, approxi-mately between 250-500 ml.

SANITATION A - CLEANER™(BIOLOGICAL CLEANER)

MAINTENANCE

132

MAINTENANCE

SAFETY AND HANDLING




133MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

SOLBREAK is an innovative, powerful sol-vent, emulsifying product, engineered for use ingeneral cleaning, degreasing and light carbona-ceous deposits removal in engine rooms, bilges,cargo tanks and other installations.Furthermore, it may be used as a generaldegreaser in special situations where optimumresults are sought.Its unique characteristic allows the quick breakdown of the after clean emulsions into twophases, a water phase and an organic (oil)phase. This provides us with the ability to dis-pose of the waste solution according to MAR-POL and IMO regulations.


- A concentrated degreasing cleaning solutionideal for use in cleaning cargo tanks, deeptanks, bilges, engine rooms, decks etc.

- Acts quickly and thoroughly - readily dispers-es in water.

- Separates the waste emulsions and breaksdown the water from the oil into two phases.That way, it provides the advantage to dis-charge the waste on land/on shore slop sta-tions around the world.

- Non-corrosive, non-toxic and non-conduc-tive.

- Alternatively, sometimes used as a generaldegreaser in difficult cleaning situations, itwill also contribute to gas freeing.

- Can be safely applied to all kinds and types ofmetal surfaces (painted or not).

- No known effect on rubber and plastic com-pounds.

- May be combined with a specific range ofproducts.


During 1996, chemical tankers were only per-mitted to use tank cleaning agents, which hadbeen approved and evaluated by theInternational Maritime Organisation (IMO). SOLBREAK was evaluated through IMO'sWorking Group on the Evaluation of Safety andPollution Hazards of Chemicals (ESPHWorking Group) and found to meet the require-ments of paragraph 1.8.2 of the P&A Standards.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

SOLBREAK is a blend of superior organic sol-vents, non-ionic and anionic surfactants andchemical advanced wetting agents.Appearance / Color : Pale liquidSpecific gravity : 0.85/15°CFlash Point : > 40°COdor : Slight aromatic

solvent odor

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

The quantity of SOLBREAK to be used is pro-portional to the degree of cleaning required, theavailable downtime and the level of residualcontamination. As such, the appropriate quan-tity to be used should be based on the user'sjudgment. However, for light contamination, adilution with water is possible. For mediumcontamination a dilution with gas oil is feasible,where as for heavy contamination, it is sug-gested to use SOLBREAK undiluted. Note thatin the two last cases, where water is absent andimmersion/soaking method is being used, theremaining solution can still be used for furthercleaning; this can be for the same immersion

MAINTENANCE

SOLBREAK™

134

MAINTENANCE

/soaking method or for another type of productapplication method i.e. brushing.B. Cleaning Procedure

Once the quantity of SOLBREAK is deter-mined, apply using any of the methods ofbrushing and/or soaking/immersion.Brushing is used in situations where small areashave heavy deposition and on highly contami-nated parts or engine components. Brushing isalso good for the awkward areas.

Soaking/Immersion is used in situations wherewe deal with dismantled parts, articles andengine components. Here, brushing may beapplied in coordination with immersion toremove heavy accumulation.After the application, no matter what methodhas been used, you must rinse off with sea orfresh water (preferably warm and under highpressure).

SAFETY AND HANDLING




135MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

MARICOTE ALOX is a highly effective com-pound of selected oils and rust preventatives,which form a corrosion protective coating,capable of floating on ballast-deballast tanks.The main advantage of being able to coat bal-last tanks by floating, is when the manual appli-cation methods are considered difficult, if notimpossible, due to limited space, poor illumina-tion and the humidity, which can make the fol-lowing procedures very difficult, maneuvering,application and drying.


- It is an efficient ballast tank flotation coatinginhibitor for corrosion protection.

- Odorless, non-toxic, non-oxidizing, non-cor-rosive and non-flammable.

- Forms a flexible, elastic and long lasting coat-ing.

- Can safely be used on all metal surfaces andmetal alloys.

- No effects on rubber or plastic compounds.- It has insulating properties and can be easily

removed when necessary. - Harmless to macro and microorganisms.- Provides quick and reliable results and is very

stable- Cost effective, simple to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

MARICOTE ALOX is a viscous liquid com-pound consisting of supreme quality oil and rustpreventatives.

Appearance/color : Dark brown liquidOdor : OdorlessSpecific gravity : 0.9 kg/lt at 15°CDynamic Viscosity : 30 mPas at 20ºCFlash Point : >200ºCDensity : 0.91 gr/cm3 at 20ºC

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

MARICOTE ALOX may be applied either byfloating or by spraying.Floating Method: For tank sides, about 10 mmof MARICOTE ALOX must be floated acrossthe top of the water. This is equivalent to 80litres per 10 square meters.For coating the sides and ends of the tank aswell as the determined single area of greatestsurface, a coverage rate of 6 square meters perlitre of MARICOTE ALOX is required.Spraying Method: A single coat, double pass,should provide a 3 mm thickness, which isequivalent to a spray coverage of 46.5 squaremeters on new construction and approximately23.5 square meters per gallon on rusty surfaces.Internal structures may require up to 5 times thegallons required for only the boundary (L,W, H)tank dimensions.B. Application Procedure

Floating Method: All surfaces must be cleanand free from scales, rust, silt and other sedi-ment. Pour the required amount of MARICOTEALOX onto the surface of the water. Fill tankslowly (max. 50 mm/min), minimizing turbu-lence until it stops, to allow the product reformlayer. The product must be well distributed tospread evenly on lightening holes, holding thewater level at a depth in the tank. Then presstank to coat overheads. Areas that may not becoated because of air pockets, should besprayed. De-ballast gradually. Repeat ballastingand de-ballasting as mentioned above.Spraying Method: Before spraying, all surfacesmust be clean and free from scales, rust, silt andother sediment. Then according to dosage

COATINGS

MARICOTE ALOX™

136

COATINGS

instructions, calculate the quantity needed.Wearing a protective, stain-proof, overall suitand a self-breathing apparatus, spray MARI-COTE ALOX on the desired tank surface areasby means of conventional spraying equipmentor a more sophisticated high-pressure sprayingmachine at the rate prescribed in the dosinginstructions. This application might be neces-sary to be repeated depending on the desiredfilm thickness, if any. Otherwise, 3 mm thick-ness is suggested. Allow 48 hours with normalventilation before putting the tank into service. Note that for best results, always spray over-heads of tanks. Also, MARICOTE ALOXshould not be applied by brush or roller becausethese applications disturb the uniformity of theplatelet formation.

APPROVED SPECIFICATIONS

MARICOTE ALOX meets the requirements ofU.S. federal specification MIL-R-21006 "Rust

Retarding Compound, Flotation Type, BallastTank Protective".


Depending on tank construction (framing, stiff-eners, intercostails, etc.) use from 100-150%extra quantity of MARICOTE ALOX for thesesurfaces. In some extreme cases e.g. a forwarddouble bottom, as much as 5 times the calcu-lated quantity is required.

SAFETY AND HANDLING

MARICOTE ALOX should not be used inpotable water tanks or tanks used for ediblematerials.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




137MARICHEM®


®MMMM COATINGS

DESCRIPTION

PLASTIC COATING is a revolutionary bitumi-nous highly viscous product, engineered to sat-isfy extremely demanding conditions. It is for-mulated with specific wetting agents, specialinert additive compounds and advanced sur-face-active agents that form together to create,an adherent protective, homogeneous and elas-tic dense layer, that will protect all metal sur-faces and spaces such as bulk holds, dry holds,decks, docks, etc, against corrosion.


- Once applied it protects and keeps the coatedsurface free from corrosion.

- Enriched with fine rubber powder and is100% water-soluble.


- No negative effects on rubber or plastic com-pounds.

- Forms a flexible, elastic and long lasting coat-ing with insulating properties

- Harmless to macro and microorganisms.- Provides quick and reliable results, whilst be-

ing very stable.- Cost effective, simple to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

PLASTIC COATING is a concentrated, bitumi-nous base coating material consisting of specialinert additives, wetting agents and surface-ac-tive agents.

Appearance / Color : Viscous, black colorOdor : OdorlessSpecific gravity : 0.93-0.97/15°CWater content : 48%Solids content : 52%Oxygen uptake (mg/g) : 0.97

PACKAGING


APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

PLASTIC COATING is applied in quantitiesproportional to the surface area to be covered,and should be diluted with 8-12% water.Note that 1 liter of PLASTIC COATING cancover an area of approximately 2-3 sq. meters ata layer thickness of 220 microns. However, incases where the surface to be treated is newbuild then the quantity to use is smaller than forhigh pitting surfaces.

B. Preparation

PLASTIC COATING must be applied to aclean, dry surface, free of rust and any looseparticles. Therefore the following steps must betaken:1. Initially, remove loose rust scales and rustblisters either by a high- pressure water supplyand/or by water/sand blasting, for heavy accu-mulation, use a high-pressure machine.2. Apply under pressure, a RUST SHIELDPHOS solution with water at a ratio of 1:2, byuse of spraying equipment.3. Leave solution to act for 15 minutes and thenwash thoroughly with a high pressure watersource.4. Let surface dry completely before applyingthe PLASTIC COATING. To assist with quickerdrying, use a hot air fan.

C. Application Procedure

1. Make sure that the surface to be coated is dryand clean.2. Dilute PLASTIC COATING with 8-12%water and mix very well.

PLASTIC COATING™

138

COATINGS

3. Apply on the surface by a brush, after theproduct has been strained, so that to avoid anypossible clogging.4. Allow the coated surface to dry completelyfor at least 48 hours in dry environment and forat least 96 hours in a humid environment.However, always check the coating on dailybasis. Longer time periods may be needed fordrying, than those prescribed above.5. After drying, ballasting is possible.

TESTS AND APPROVALS

PLASTIC COATING has been tested andapproved by:- BUREAU VERITAS- DET NORSKE VERITAS- HELLENIC REGISTER OF SHIPPING- EFEH AND ASSOCIATES

SAFETY AND HANDLING




147MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

STRONG PLASTIC RESISTANT is an inno-vative liquid product engineered to coat smallsurface areas, installations and constructionsmade of steel, cast iron, aluminum, copper,bronze, etc. Its purpose is to protect areas fromhighly erosive conditions and strong chemicalattacks. Its high quality manufacturing stan-dards and specifications provide 100% efficientand reliable results. STRONG PLASTICRESISTANT is considered to give the highestprotection and insulation available; this is dueto its two-component nature (see below fordetails).


- Effectively protects all surfaces, installations,parts and unit components from corrosion andchemical oxidation and/or reduction reac-tions.


- No negative effects on rubber and plasticcompounds.

- Provides quick and reliable results and hasinsulating properties.

- Non-corrosive, non-conductive, non-flammable and non-toxic.

- A two-component product: the resin basesubstance (A) and the hardener (B), whichmust be mixed before application.

- Cost effective, simple to apply and use.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

STRONG PLASTIC RESISTANT is a thick,white-color liquid product consisting of acidand alkali-proof compounds able to withstandlong contact with alcohols, oils, fuels, solvents,detergents, salt compounds etc. Moreover, itsabrasive and high resistance character with-stands temperatures up to 120°C.

PACKAGING

Order No Size (in litres) Container920103 1 2 Tin cans

one of 750 mlresin material (A)and one of 250 mlhardener (B).

APPLICATION AND USE

A. Dosing Procedure

STRONG PLASTIC RESISTANT must beapplied, after the components (A) and (B) aremixed, undiluted and in quantities proportionalto the surface area to be covered.Note that 1litre of STRONG PLASTIC RESIS-TANT can cover approximately an area of 5 sq.meters.B. Preparation

STRONG PLASTIC RESISTANT must beapplied on a clean and dry surface free of anyloose particles. Therefore, the surface to becoated must be acid etched, washed and dried.This may be accomplished by mixing one partof CEMENT REMOVER with two parts ofwater, which is then applied onto the surface inquestion. Leave it to act for 15 minutes andwash thoroughly with large quantities of waterand a brush, in order to remove all loose parti-cles, salt and rust deposits.Then, leave the cleaned surface to dry com-pletely.C. Application Procedure

Before applying STRONG PLASTIC RESIS-TANT on the dry and clean surface to becoated, mix component A (base material) andcomponent B (hardener) very well for 2 min-utes. Then, apply the product onto the surface,up to a maximum of 3 layers.However, the time period for each layer of theapplication, is dependent on the temperature,

COATINGS

STRONG PLASTIC RESISTANT™

148

COATINGS

each layer is only good to applied, after inter-vals of between 4-24 hours have passed, thiswill ensure appropriate drying of each layer.Thus for higher temperatures the intervals aresmaller than for lower temperatures.Note that the product will fulfill its propertiesand be operational only after 4-7 hours since thelast layer coat application.

SAFETY AND HANDLING




MARICHEM®

P A R T I

TEST KITS

BOILER WATER TREATMENT TEST KITS

151MARICHEM®


®MMMM BOILER WATER TREATMENT TEST KITS

DESCRIPTION

ALKALINITY TEST KIT is engineered todetect CaCO3 salt content, expressed in partsper million (ppm), in boiler water systems. Thetest results obtained, enable us to determine thequantity of ALKALINITY CONTROL neces-sary or not in order to regulate the water prop-erties as they must be adjusted to the boiler'sefficient and effective operation.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

A. Accessories

One piece of 1 ml graduated plastic syringewith a tip.One piece of 5 ml graduated plastic syringewith a tip.One piece of 5 ml marked plastic vial. B. Reagents

Two pieces of 85 ml bottles Reagent 1 solution.One piece of 24 ml bottle Reagent 2 solution.One piece of 24 ml bottle Reagent 3 solution.

PACKAGING

Order No Unit (in set) Container700101 1 Plastic case

TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Pre-treatment

Before testing, samples must be cooled to 25°Cby passing them through a cooler.

B. Instructions

For positive p-value1. Use the 5 ml plastic syringe to fill the markedplastic vial with 5ml of the water sample.2. Add two drops of Reagent 2 and shake lightlyuntil the solution turns reddish rose. If itremains colorless, determine the positive m-value according to the positive m-value testinstructions that follow.

3. If the solution has turned reddish rose, fillthe 1 ml plastic syringe by drawing 1 ml fromReagent 1 solution up until the lower edge ofthe syringe levels with scale graduation mark1.0. 4. Lightly shake the sample solution and drop-wise add reagent 1, with the filled syringe, untilthe color changes to colorless.5. Read off the level of Reagent 1 used in thesyringe and convert to ppm using the TestResults Evaluation Table below.For positive m-value1. Keep the water sample from the second stepof the positive p-value test.2. Add 2 drops of Reagent 3 and shake lightly.The solution should turn blue. If it turns orange,there is no acid capacity in the water. Alkalinecapacity can be determined.3. Titrate as described in the positive p-valuetest, until the color changes to gray and then toorange. 4. Read off the level of Reagent 1 used in thesyringe. Calculate the m-value alkalinity asppm CaCO3 = (ml Reagent 1 from test 1 + mlReagent 1 from test 2) X 600.

C. Additional information

- In order to be able to measure erratic changesof the pH values, which do not occur at thepoint of neutrality (pH 7), suitable indicatorshave to be used for the pH intervals 0-7 and 7-14. The use of such indicators explains the useof the positive m and p value tests.- Positive m-alkalinity value should be lowerthan twice the positive p-alkalinity value. If not,add 1 litre of ALKALINITY CONTROL andrepeat the test after three hours time.

ALKALINITY TEST KIT™

152



NOTES

- For samples less than 100 ppm as CaCO3,supply the system with the prescribed dosageof ALKALINITY CONTROL as in the chartabove.

- For samples greater than 150 ppm as CaCO3perform blowdown and the system with theinitial dosage of ALKALINITY CONTROLprescribed below.

INITIAL DOSAGE

ALKALINITY CONTROL:150 ml/ton of fresh water.After initial dosage is introduced into the sys-tem, perform the test twice between every 3-6hour interval; afterwards test daily, until stabi-lization of system has been achieved.Thereafter, tests may be conducted in intervalsof two to three days or so.

TEST RESULTS FOLLOW UP

Once the test results are obtained, they must berecorded in the MARICHEM BOILINGWATER TREATMENT LOG BOOK. Notethat, at the end of every month, the vessel's headengineer must submit these Log Books to theowner company, who in turn should submit LogBooks to MARICHEM MARIGASESWorldwide Services for further evaluation andtechnical instructions.

ml of Reagent 1 0-0.05 0.06-0.12 0.13-0.15 0.16-0.25 Over 0.25

ppm as CaCO3 0-30 40-70 80-90 100-150 Over 150

Dosage Per Ton of Water 0.15 L 0.10 L 0.05 L Satisfactory Blowdown




153MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

The WT Alka Test Kit is engineered for thedetermination of P&M Alkalinity value in thewater treatment systems. The P&M Alkalinity'svalue is expressed in parts per million (ppm) inthe Boiler System. The test results enable us todefine any time the quantity of AlkalinityControl necessary or not in order to regulate thewater properties, as they must be adjusted to theboiler's efficiency and effective operation.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

Contents of the test kit are sufficient for 200tests with an average Alkalinity value of 10°d(German degrees) or 4 mmol/lt HCl. A. Accessories

1 piece of Test tube with a ring mark of 5ml1 piece of Titration syringe 0-7,2 mmol/lt HClor respectively 0-20 °d (1 graduation mark =0,5 °d or 0,2 mmol/lt)B. Reagents

1 bottle of 100ml titration solution CarbonateHardness TL C 201 bottle of 10ml of indicator P1 bottle of 10ml of indicator M

PACKAGING


HAZARD WARNING

This test does not contain any harmful sub-stances, which must be specially labeled as haz-ardous. For further information please read thetest kit material safety data sheet (MSDS).

TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Determination of P-Alkalinity Value

1. Rinse the test tube several times with the testsample and fill it up to the mark of 5 ml.

2. Add 1 drop of the indicator P and mix byshaking. If the test sample remains colorless theP-Alkalinity value is 0. Then you have to con-tinue from the part B for the determination ofM-Alkalinity's value.3. If the test sample color turns red, fill the titra-tion syringe with the solution CarbonateHardness TL C 20 till the indication 0.4.Add the titration solution Carbonate HardnessTL C 20 dropwise and when red color has com-pletely vanished, you must immediately start togently shake the test tube.5. Read off the P-Alkalinity value in °d or inmmol /lt HCl and convert it in parts per million(ppm) CaCO3, for that purposes you may beadvised by the part C.B. Determination of M-Alkalinity Value

1. Keep the water sample of the P-Alkalinitytest for the determination of the M-Alkalinity'svalue.2. Add 1 drop of indicator M and mix by shak-ing until the water sample turns blue. If sampleturns orange the M-Alkalinity value is identicalwith the P-Alkalinity value.3. Titrate the water sample as described abovewith the solution Carbonate Hardness TL C 20that has remained in the syringe from the P-Alkalinity determination till the solution turnsorange. In case the syringe filling is not suffi-cient to reach color change fill up the syringeonce more with the solution CarbonateHardness TL C 20 and continue titration till thecolor change as described above.4. Read off the M-Alkalinity's value in °d ormmol /lt HCl and convert it to parts per million(ppm) as Calcium Carbonate CaCO3. The quan-tity of titration solution that used in all the pro-cedure corresponds with the M-Alkalinity valueC. Evaluation of the test result

For the conversion of the P & M-Alkalinity val-ue from mmol/lt HCl or °d to parts per million


WT ALKA TEST KIT™

154

(ppm) as CaCO3, you may consider the follow-ing:1 °d = 17,8 mg/lt CaCO3 or1 mmol/lt HCl = 49,8 mg / lt CaCO3 = 50 ppm CaCO3

For samples less than 100ppm CaCO3 of theP-Alkalinity supply the system with the dosageof Alkalinity Control as presented in the fol-lowing table.For samples greater than 150ppm CaCO3, per-form blowdown and replenish with distilled orfresh water and determine the P and M-Alkalinity after the system's replenishment.The ALKALINITY CONTROL dosage whichhas to be applied anytime you perform the testin the Boiler System is described by the table.Initial dosage of ALKALINITY CONTROL:150 ml/ tones of fresh waterAfter initial dosage has been introduced into thesystem, you have to perform the tests twiceevery 3-6 hours and on a daily basis, until sta-bilization of the system.There-after tests may be conducted in two tothree days intervals or so.

D. Additional Information

The M-Alkalinity value should be lower thantwice the P-Alkalinity value. If not, then add 1liter of Alkalinity Control and repeat the testagain after 2 hours time.In order to be able to measure erratic changes ofthe pH values, which do not occur at the pointof neutrality (pH=7), suitable indicators have tobe used for the pH intervals 0-7 and 7-14. After the test results are obtained, they must berecorded in the MARICHEM Boiler WaterTreatment Log Sheets. At the end of everymonth, these Log Sheets should be submittedby the head engineer to the owner company,who in turn should send them to MARICHEMMARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES forfurther evaluation and technical analysis.For more information and literature concerningthe WT Alka Test Kit measurements and theBoiler Water Treatment program, feel free tocontact the MARICHEM MARIGASES techni-cal department.





155MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

CHLORIDE TEST KIT has been designed tocount the concentration of chloride ions inwater. Specifically, its purpose is to determinechloride ions concentration in high and low-pressure water boilers as well as marine enginecooling systems. The test results obtained, incoordination with results from the other watertests (Phosphate, Alkalinity, Nitrite, etc.) pro-vide us with the relevant information about thewater conditions for the system in question.This way, we can determine the need for blow-down or not.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

A. Accessories

Two pieces of 1 ml graduated plastic syringewith a tip.One piece of 10 ml standard volume glass testtubes.One piece of color comparison card.One piece of foam color comparison base.

B. Reagents

Two pieces of 21 ml bottles Reagent 1 solution.Two pieces of 18 ml bottles Reagent 2 solution.One piece of 25 ml bottle chloride check solu-tion, 2.5 mg/ml concentration.One piece of 90 ml bottle De-Ionized water fordilution.

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Pre-treatment


B. Instructions

1. Remove the box top and place it on a flat sur-face upside down so that the color comparisoncard is visible.2. Place the comparator foam base on the sideof the color chart.3. Use the 1 ml graduated plastic syringe to fillthe 10 ml standard volume glass tube with 2.5ml of water sample.4. Add 3 drops of Reagent 1 in the tube, closeand shake lightly to mix.5. Open the tube, add 3 drops of Reagent 2,close and shake lightly to mix. 6. Open the tube and place it on the foam colorcomparator base in the reception cavity. Movethe foam base until the colors match.7. Read off the measured value on the righthand side next to the color comparison chart.


"Use of de-ionized water when themeasuring range is exceeded"

If the test result exceeds the intended measuringrange, it is advised to dilute the test at a ratio of1:1 with the de-ionized water solution enclosed.This is done by filling the tube with 1.25 ml,using the 1 ml graduated plastic syringe, of thewater sample, which we dilute with 1.25 ml ofde-ionized water. Then the test is carried out asusual. Note, that the result recorded off thecolor chart has to be multiplied by 2 in order toattain the measure of the undiluted sample.Other dilution ratios can also be applied.

"Use of the check solution"

a. To test the check result in the water sample

The water sample may contain substances,which would give inaccurate results due totheir action as complex agents. For this reason,the check solution is used to control the test's


CHLORIDE TEST KIT™

156


accuracy. So, before the test is initiated, add 0.1ml with the 1 ml graduated plastic syringe (cor-responding to 100 ppm of chloride ions in thewater sample) of the check solution into thewater sample. After color matching, the resultshould be calculated by adding the 100ppmaccounting for the correction of the solution tothe result measured when the test was con-ducted without checking the solution.

b. To test the functioning of the test kitIn order to test the function parameters of thetest, fill the 10 ml standard glass tube with 2.5ml of de-ionized water. Then use the 1 ml grad-uated plastic syringe to add 0.15 ml of the checksolution to the same tube. Now, carry out thetest as usual. The result obtained has to readexactly 150 ppm of chloride ions.This check test for the functioning of the test kitis suggested to carry out when storing condi-tions are unsuitable, such as high temperatureand extended sunlight exposure, or upon thedate of expiration, which is labeled on the bot-tle.


NOTE

- For samples less than 300 ppm chloride con-centration, the system does not need blow-down.

- For samples greater than 300 ppm chlorideconcentration, perform blowdown.


After the test results are obtained, must berecorded in the MARICHEM BOILER WATERTREATMENT GRAPHIC LOG BOOK. Notethat, at the end of every month, the vessel's headengineer must submit these Log Books to theowner company, who in turn should submit LogBooks to MARICHEM MARIGASES World-wide Services for further evaluation and techni-cal instructions.

ppm 5 10 20 40 75 150 300 Over 300

NO BLOWDOWN BLOWDOWN




DESCRIPTION

The WT Chlori Test Kit is designed to count theconcentration of Chloride ions in water.Specifically, its purpose is to check and controlthe Chloride ions in high and low pressurewater boilers and in marine engine CoolingSystems. The test results obtained in coordina-tion with the other water tests (WT Phosp,WTAlka, Nitrite etc.) provide us with relevantinformation about the water conditions.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

Contents of the test kit are sufficient for 300tests with an average Chloride concentrationcontent of 200 mg/lt Cl¯.A. Accessories

1 piece of Plastic test tube with a ring mark of5ml. 1 piece of Titration syringe 0 - 500 mg/lt Cl¯

(1 graduation mark = 5mg/lt).B. Reagents

1 Bottle of 10ml indicator solution, IndicatorCL - 5001 Bottle of 30ml reagent solution 4% NitricAcid 1 Bottle of 100ml titration solution Chloride TLCL 500

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Determination of Chloride Ions Cl-

1. Rinse the test tube several times with thesample you wish to determine the Chloride ionsconcentration Cl¯and fill the test tube with thesample, up to the ring mark of 5ml.

2. Add 1 drop of the solution, Indicator CL 500and dissolve while shaking. The test samplecolor must turn blue.3. Add slowly drop wise the Solution NitricAcid 4 % until the color turns yellow while con-tinuously shaking. Normally 2-3 drops are suf-ficient for the change in color.4. Use the titration syringe and fill it with thesolution Chloride TL CL 500 till the value of 0mg/lt. Add the titration Solution dropwisewhile lightly swirling the test tube until thecolor turns from yellow to violet.5. Read off the sample Chloride content inmg/lt Cl¯ (lower rim of the black plunger) fromthe titration syringe in parts per million.

B. Evaluation of the Test Results

With that procedure we can determine the con-centration of Chloride ions in ppm without anyconversion in the unit.For the Boiler Water samples (Boiler WaterTreatment) which contain more than 300ppm ofChloride Cl¯concentration you have to performblowdown and replenish with distilled or freshwater.

As for the Cooling Water samples (CoolingWater Treatment) which contain more than60ppm of Chloride Cl¯concentration you haveto perform partial draining and replenish withdistilled water.

It is worth being noted, that it does not exist norhas it been suggested, any other way of reduc-ing the Chloride ions concentration, except byblowdown and replenishment of the systemwith distilled or fresh water.

Considering the procedure of water replenish-ment for both Boiler and Cooling water systemyou may be advised by the following tables.

157MARICHEM®



WT CHLORI TEST KIT™

158

C. Additional Information

Chlorides have no effect on scale formation, butdo contribute to corrosion because of their con-ductivity and because the small size of theChloride ion permitting the continuous flow ofcorrosion current when surface films areporous.

The amount of Chloride in the water is a usefultool in evaporative systems. Virtually all otherconstituents in the water increase or decreasewhen common treatment chemicals are addedor because of chemical changes that take place.With very few exceptions, evaporation onlyaffects Chloride concentration, and so the ratioof Chloride in water sample from an operatingsystem to those of the make-up water providesa measure of how much the water has been con-centrated.

Take also into consideration that the Chlorideconcentration will change if the system contin-uously chlorinated.

After the test results are obtained, they must berecorded in the MARICHEM Boiler WaterTreatment Log Sheets. At the end of everymonth, these Log Sheets should be submittedby the head engineer to the owner company,who in turn should send them to MARICHEMMARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES forfurther evaluation and technical analysis.

For more information and literature concerningthe WT Chlori Test Kit measurements and theBoiler Water Treatment program, feel free tocontact the MARICHEM MARIGASES techni-cal department.





159MARICHEM®



DESCRIPTION

PHOSPHATE TEST KIT is designed to pro-duce reliable test results for the concentration ofphosphate ions in the boiler's water; we are thenable to ensure proper hardness control by regu-lating the formation of hard calcium salts.Hence, we can determine the quantity ofPHOSPHATE and B.W.T. NEW FORMULA orB.W.T. POWDER necessary or not, in order tomaintain the ideal water conditions for ourboiler systems.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

A. Accessories

One piece of 1 ml graduated plastic syringewith a tip.

One piece of 5 ml graduated plastic syringewith a tip.

Two pieces of 20 ml standard volume glass testtubes.

One piece of color comparison card.One piece of foam color comparison base.

B. ReagentsThree pieces of 85 ml bottles Reagent 1 solu-

tion.One piece of 25 ml bottle Check Phosphate

solution.One piece of 90 ml bottle De-ionized water for

dilution.

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Pre-treatment


B. Instructions

1. Remove the box top and place it on a flat sur-face upside down so that the color comparisoncard is visible.2. Place the color comparator foam base on theside of the color chart.3. Rinse the test tubes (A and B) with watersample before testing.4. Fill both test tubes (A and B) to the lowermark with water sample and place them in thecolor comparator foam base receptions in sucha way that tube B is placed over the orange-yel-low color column.5. Add 1.2 ml of reagent 1, with the 1 ml grad-uated plastic syringe, into test tube A. Thenscrew the cup and mix.6. Place tube A in the color comparator foambase reception (next to tube B) and move thefoam base until the colors match.7. Read off the measured value on the righthand side next to the color comparison chart.8. Refer to the Test Results Evaluation Chartfound below, for dosage adjustment.


"Use of de-ionized water when themeasuring range is exceeded"If the test result exceeds the intended measuringrange, it is advised to dilute the test at a ratio of1:1 with the de-ionized water solution enclosed.This is done by filling the tube with 5 ml, usingthe 5 ml plastic syringe, of the water sample,which we dilute with de-ionized water to thetube's lower mark. Then the test is carried out asusual. Note, that the result recorded off thecolor chart has to be multiplied by 2 in order toattain the measure of the undiluted sample.Other dilution ratios can also be applied.

PHOSPHATE TEST KIT™

160




The water sample may contain substances,which would give inaccurate results due totheir action as complex agents. For this reason,the check solution is used to control the test'saccuracy. So, before the test is initiated, add 0.1ml with the 1 ml graduated plastic syringe (cor-responding to 18 ppm of phosphate ions in thewater sample) of the check solution into thewater sample, which is contained at the lowermark in test tube A. After color matching, theresult should be calculated by adding the 18ppm accounting for the correction of the solu-tion to the result measured when the test wasconducted without checking the solution.b. To test the functioning of the test kit

In order to test the function parameters of thetest, fill both A and B tubes with the de-ionizedwater to the lower mark. Then use the 1 mlgraduated plastic syringe to add 0.1 ml of thecheck solution to test tube A. Now, carry out thetest as usual. The result obtained has to readexactly 18 ppm of phosphate ions. This checktest for the functioning of the test kit is sug-gested to carry out when storing conditions areunsuitable, such as high temperature andextended sunlight exposure, or upon the date ofexpiration, which is labeled on the bottle.


NOTE

For sample results less than 20 ppm phosphateconcentration, supply the system with the pre-scribed dosage as in the chart below.For sampleresults greater than 40 ppm phosphate concen-tration, perform blowdown and supply with theinitial dosage prescribed below.INITIAL DOSAGE

PHOSPHATE:350-650 gr/10 tons of fresh water.B.W.T. NEW FORMULA:1 litre/ton of fresh water.B.W.T. POWDER:200 gr/ton of fresh water.Once initial dosage is introduced into the sys-tem, perform daily tests until stabilization ofthe phosphate concentration in the system.Thereafter, tests may be conducted once everytwo days or so.



TEST RESULT 0-10 ppm 10-20 ppm 20-40 ppm Over 40 ppm

QUANTITY OF PHOSPHATE TO BE ADDED 30 g/ton of water 15 g/ton of water Satisfactory Blowdown




161MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

The WT Phosp Test Kit is designed for thedetermination of Phosphate ion concentrationin the water. The Phosphate ions act as scaleinhibitors in the water systems while preventingthe precipitation of salts which result in scaleformation. At the same time they also act as cor-rosion inhibitors by the formation of a thin filmon the metallic surfaces. With the determinationof the Phosphate ion concentration, the properdosage of Phosphate, BWT New Formula orBWT Powder can be defined, which is neces-sary to adjust the water conditions of the BoilerSystem.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

The contents of the test kit are sufficient for 100tests as many as the number of the sticks whichcan be found in the metallic package.

ACCESSORIES

1 piece of test tube with a ring mark of 5ml.2 pieces of small test tubes.1 piece of metallic package with 100 test sticksand a color indicator.REAGENTS

1 bottle of 30ml reagent solution Phosphate - 11 bottle of 30ml reagent solution Phosphate - 2

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Determination of Phosphate Ions PO4-3

1. Rinse the test tube several times with thesample you wish to determine the Phosphateions concentration PO4

-3 and fill it with the sam-ple up to the ring mark of 5ml.

2.Add 5 drops of the reagent solution Phosphate1 (Nitric Acid 19%) and shake it carefully. 3. Take the one of the two small test tubes andfill it carefully with 6 drops of the reagent solu-tion Phosphate - 2 and keep the solution. Youmay put it in the recess of the test kit plasticpackage.4. Remove from the metallic package as manysticks as required for the measurement andreseal the container after use. Do not touch thetest paper zone.5. Place the test stick into the prepared samplefrom the step 2 and let it in the solution forabout 15 seconds while shaking carefully.6. Then place the test stick into the small testtube which filled with the Solution Phosphate -2 from the step 3, for about 15 seconds. 7. Remove the stick from the small tube andafter 60 seconds compare the color of the stickwith the color scale on the metallic package. Ifthe Phosphate ions are present the colourchanges to blue green.


With this procedure we can determine directlythe Phosphate ion concentration in the BoilerSystem.

For samples less than 20 ppm of Phosphate theBoiler System has to be supplied with the rele-vant Phosphate, BWT New Formula or BWTPowder dosage according to the followingtable.

For samples greater than 40 ppm of Phosphateperform blowdown, replenish with fresh waterand check again the Phosphate concentration.

The dosage which has to be applied of thePhosphate, BWT New Formula or BWTPowder anytime you perform the test in theBoiler System is described by the table.


WT PHOSP TEST KIT™

162

Initial dosage of Phosphate:50 gr /tn of water

Initial dosage of BWT New Formula: 1 lt /tn of water

Initial dosage of BWT Powder:60 gr /tn of water


Making treatment in the Boiler system by theBWT New Formula or BWT Powder to adjustthe Phosphate, it will significantly affect theAlkalinity and Sulfite concentrations. So it isrecommended when you make treatment withthese chemicals to check all the concentrationsin the Boiler system even the pH value.Should you adjust only the Phosphate concen-tration then you have to make treatment using

Phosphate. In that case however certainly it willaffect the alkalinity but it wouldn't be a signifi-cant change in the alkalinity's value.


For more information and literature concerningthe WT Phosp Test Kit measurements and theBoiler Water Treatment program, feel free tocontact the MARICHEM MARIGASES techni-cal department.





163MARICHEM®



DESCRIPTION

SULFITE TEST KIT is engineered to detectsodium sulfite concentration in re-circulatingboiler water systems by testing boiler watersamples in order to determine the system'seffectiveness against free oxygen. This way, wemay specify the quantity of OXYCONTROLand BOILING WATER TREATMENT neededor not, in order to stabilize the system beingeither low-pressure or high-pressure.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

A. Accessories

One piece of 10 ml measuring plastic vial.One piece of 6 ml graduated plastic syringe.One piece of 50 mg/l graduated titration pipette.

B. Reagents

One piece of 20 ml bottle reagent 1 solution.One piece of 20 ml bottle reagent 2 solution.Two pieces of 85 ml bottles titrant solution.

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

1. Rinse the measuring plastic vial with samplewater and fill to the 5 ml mark.2. Add two drops of reagent 1 and 2 drops ofreagent 2 and shake to mix

3. Draw and fill the graduated titration pipettewith titrant solution to the 0 mark.4. Using the titration pipette, add titrant solutiondrop-wise until the color of the solutionchanges from colorless to blue. 5. Read off the sodium sulfite content of the wa-ter in mg/l from the scale on the titration pipetteand compare the founded value to the TestResults Evaluation Chart below.


NOTES

The tests performed represent the concentrationmaintained in the system at that particularperiod. If the levels of sulfite are observed to behigher or lower than what it is advised to bethen consult the evaluation chart below in orderto decrease or increase the daily dosage by25%, respectively. Performance of the test on a daily basis formaximum control, is also recommended.

INITIAL DOSAGE

When for some reason blow-down of the sys-tem is performed, then, the initial dosage of 0.3litre of OXYCONTROL per ton of the boiler'swater must be introduced into the system untilequilibration of the sulfite concentration as pre-scribed in the evaluation chart is accomplished.This may be done with careful and daily testscorresponding to the correction of the systemby regulation of the quantity of OXYCON-TROL contained in the water.

SULFITE TEST KIT™

0-450 psi PPM as SO 0-20 20-30 30+

450-850 psi PPM as SO 0-10 10-15 15+

DOSAGE Increase 25% Satisfactory Decrease 25%

3

2-

3

2-

164







165MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

The WT Sulfi Test Kit is engineered to detectSodium Sulfite concentration in re-circulatingBoiler Water systems by testing Boiler Watersamples. This way we can determine the effec-tiveness of the system against free Oxygen. Wemay also specify the quantity of Oxycontrolneeded or not in order to stabilize the systembeing at either low or high pressure.

CONTENTS OF THE TEST KIT

Contents of the test kits are sufficient for 200tests with an average Sulfite concentration up to50mg/lt SO3

-2.

A. Accessories

1 piece of Plastic test tube with a ring mark of5ml1 piece of Graduated syringe 0-1 ml1 piece of Titration syringe 0-100 mg/lt (1 graduation mark = 2mg/lt)

B. Reagents

1 Bottle of 100ml reagent solution, Sulfit-11 Bottle of 30ml reagent solution, Sulfit-2 1 Bottle of 10ml indicator solution, Sulfit-31 Bottle of 100ml titration solution, Sulfit TLSU 100

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Determination of Phosphate Ions SO3-2

1. Rinse the test tube several times with thesample you wish to determine the Sulfite ionsconcentration SO3

-2 and fill it with the sampletill the ring mark of 5ml.

2. Use the dosage syringe and fill it with 1ml ofthe reagent solution Sulfit-1 and add the contentof the syringe to the sample of water and mix. 3. Add 2 drops of the reagent Sulfit-2 and shakelightly the sample. The solution turns yellow. Incase the solution remains colorless then theSulfite ions SO3

-2 concentration is more than100 mg/lt and continue according to point 6 forthe determination of the Sulfite concentration.4. Add 1 drop of Sulfit-3, then the solution turnsgreyish to yellowish blue.5. Use the titration syringe and fill it with thesolution Sulfit TL SU 100 till the value of100mg/lt. Add the titration Solution dropwisewhile lightly swirling the test tube at the sametime. Continue slowly to add the titration solu-tion until the test solution is completely color-less. Read off the sample Sulfite content inmg/lt SO3

-2 from the titration syringe (lower rimof the black plunger).6. Should the test solution not change the colorto yellow after the addition of two drops ofSulfit-2 then the Sulfite concentration is higherthan 100 mg/lt SO3

-2. In this case repeat the testand add 2 ml of the reagent Sulfite-1 instead ofjust 1ml. Then the range of titration syringechanges from 0-100 mg/lt to 100-200 mg/lt. Inthe case of even higher Sulfite concentrationadd correspondingly larger amounts of Sulfit-1from the beginning until the addition ofSulfit-2 change the color to yellow. Howeversuch a kind of result is much greater than thesuggested Sulfite concentration levels andrarely be occurred in the Boiler Systems. B. Evaluation of the Test Results

With above procedure we can determine anySulfite concentration in the Boiler System. Ifthe Sulfite levels are observed to be higher orlower than what is advised, then you have toconsult the following evaluation table in order


WT SULFI TEST KIT™

166

to decrease or to increase the daily dosage by25% respectively.

Initial Oxycontrol Dosage:0,3 lts per ton of water

When for any reason blowdown is performed inthe Boiler system then the initial Oxycontroldosage of 0,3 lt per tone of water has to beintroduced into the system until stabilization ofthe Sulfite concentration to the satisfactory lev-els. That could be easily achieved by perform-ing the Sulfite Test on a daily basis and at any-time applying the appropriate Oxycontroldosage. Regarding the Oxycontrol dosage youhave to apply at anytime please be advised bythe table on top of the page.


Most of the corrosion damage to boilers andassociated equipment occurs during idle peri-ods. While Boilers can corrode as the results oflow boiler water pH or misuse of certain chem-icals, corrosion is primarily caused by Oxygen.

The corrosion is caused by the exposure of wetmetals to oxygen in the air or in water (pittingcorrosion).

Oxygen scavengers are chemical compoundsthat react with the residual Oxygen and theywill not only provide added protection to theBoiler but to the condensate system as well.


For more information and literature concerningthe WT Sulfi Test Kit measurements and theBoiler Water Treatment program, feel free tocontact the MARICHEM MARIGASES techni-cal department.





MARICHEM®

P A R T I

TEST KITS

COOLING WATER TREATMENT TEST KITS

169MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

CHLORIDE TEST KIT has been designed tocount the concentration of chloride ions inwater. Specifically, its purpose is to determinechloride ions concentration in high and low-pressure water boilers as well as marine enginecooling systems. The test results obtained, incoordination with results from the other watertests (Phosphate, Alkalinity, Nitrite, etc.) pro-vide us with the relevant information about thewater conditions for the system in question.This way, we can determine the need for blow-down or not.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

A. Accessories

Two pieces of 1 ml graduated plastic syringewith a tip.One piece of 10 ml standard volume glass testtubes.One piece of color comparison card.One piece of foam color comparison base.

B. Reagents

Two pieces of 21 ml bottles Reagent 1 solution.Two pieces of 18 ml bottles Reagent 2 solution.One piece of 25 ml bottle chloride check solu-tion, 2.5 mg/ml concentration.One piece of 90 ml bottle De-Ionized water fordilution.

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Pre-treatment


B. Instructions

1. Remove the box top and place it on a flat sur-face upside down so that the color comparisoncard is visible.2. Place the comparator foam base on the sideof the color chart.3. Use the 1 ml graduated plastic syringe to fillthe 10 ml standard volume glass tube with 2.5ml of water sample.4. Add 3 drops of Reagent 1 in the tube, closeand shake lightly to mix.5. Open the tube, add 3 drops of Reagent 2,close and shake lightly to mix. 6. Open the tube and place it on the foam colorcomparator base in the reception cavity. Movethe foam base until the colors match.7. Read off the measured value on the righthand side next to the color comparison chart.


"Use of de-ionized water when themeasuring range is exceeded"

If the test result exceeds the intended measuringrange, it is advised to dilute the test at a ratio of1:1 with the de-ionized water solution enclosed.This is done by filling the tube with 1.25 ml,using the 1 ml graduated plastic syringe, of thewater sample, which we dilute with 1.25 ml ofde-ionized water. Then the test is carried out asusual. Note, that the result recorded off thecolor chart has to be multiplied by 2 in order toattain the measure of the undiluted sample.Other dilution ratios can also be applied.



The water sample may contain substances,which would give inaccurate results due totheir action as complex agents. For this reason,the check solution is used to control the test's


CHLORIDE TEST KIT™

170

accuracy. So, before the test is initiated, add 0.1ml with the 1 ml graduated plastic syringe (cor-responding to 100 ppm of chloride ions in thewater sample) of the check solution into thewater sample. After color matching, the resultshould be calculated by adding the 100ppmaccounting for the correction of the solution tothe result measured when the test was con-ducted without checking the solution.

b. To test the functioning of the test kitIn order to test the function parameters of thetest, fill the 10 ml standard glass tube with 2.5ml of de-ionized water. Then use the 1 ml grad-uated plastic syringe to add 0.15 ml of the checksolution to the same tube. Now, carry out thetest as usual. The result obtained has to readexactly 150 ppm of chloride ions.This check test for the functioning of the test kitis suggested to carry out when storing condi-tions are unsuitable, such as high temperatureand extended sunlight exposure, or upon thedate of expiration, which is labeled on the bot-tle.


NOTE

- For samples less than 300 ppm chloride con-centration, the system does not need blow-down.

- For samples greater than 300 ppm chlorideconcentration, perform blowdown.




ppm 5 10 20 40 75 150 300 Over 300

NO BLOWDOWN BLOWDOWN




171MARICHEM®


®MMMM COOLING WATER TREATMENT TEST KITS

WT CHLORI TEST KIT™

DESCRIPTION

The WT Chlori Test Kit is designed to count theconcentration of Chloride ions in water.Specifically, its purpose is to check and controlthe Chloride ions in high and low pressurewater boilers and in marine engine CoolingSystems. The test results obtained in coordina-tion with the other water tests (WT Phosp,WTAlka, Nitrite etc.) provide us with relevantinformation about the water conditions.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

Contents of the test kit are sufficient for 300tests with an average Chloride concentrationcontent of 200 mg/lt Cl¯.A. Accessories

1 piece of Plastic test tube with a ring mark of5ml. 1 piece of Titration syringe 0 - 500 mg/lt Cl¯

(1 graduation mark = 5mg/lt).B. Reagents

1 Bottle of 10ml indicator solution, IndicatorCL - 5001 Bottle of 30ml reagent solution 4% NitricAcid 1 Bottle of 100ml titration solution Chloride TLCL 500

PACKAGING


TESTING PROCEDURE

A. Determination of Chloride Ions Cl-

1. Rinse the test tube several times with thesample you wish to determine the Chloride ionsconcentration Cl¯and fill the test tube with thesample, up to the ring mark of 5ml.

2. Add 1 drop of the solution, Indicator CL 500and dissolve while shaking. The test samplecolor must turn blue.3. Add slowly drop wise the Solution NitricAcid 4 % until the color turns yellow while con-tinuously shaking. Normally 2-3 drops are suf-ficient for the change in color.4. Use the titration syringe and fill it with thesolution Chloride TL CL 500 till the value of 0mg/lt. Add the titration Solution dropwisewhile lightly swirling the test tube until thecolor turns from yellow to violet.5. Read off the sample Chloride content inmg/lt Cl¯ (lower rim of the black plunger) fromthe titration syringe in parts per million.


With that procedure we can determine the con-centration of Chloride ions in ppm without anyconversion in the unit.For the Boiler Water samples (Boiler WaterTreatment) which contain more than 300ppm ofChloride Cl¯concentration you have to performblowdown and replenish with distilled or freshwater.

As for the Cooling Water samples (CoolingWater Treatment) which contain more than60ppm of Chloride Cl¯concentration you haveto perform partial draining and replenish withdistilled water.

It is worth being noted, that it does not exist norhas it been suggested, any other way of reduc-ing the Chloride ions concentration, except byblowdown and replenishment of the systemwith distilled or fresh water.

Considering the procedure of water replenish-ment for both Boiler and Cooling water systemyou may be advised by the following tables.

172


Chlorides have no effect on scale formation, butdo contribute to corrosion because of their con-ductivity and because the small size of theChloride ion permitting the continuous flow ofcorrosion current when surface films areporous.The amount of Chloride in the water is a usefultool in evaporative systems. Virtually all otherconstituents in the water increase or decreasewhen common treatment chemicals are addedor because of chemical changes that take place.With very few exceptions, evaporation onlyaffects Chloride concentration, and so the ratioof Chloride in water sample from an operatingsystem to those of the make-up water providesa measure of how much the water has been con-centrated.

Take also into consideration that the Chlorideconcentration will change if the system contin-uously chlorinated.After the test results are obtained, they must berecorded in the MARICHEM Boiler WaterTreatment Log Sheets. At the end of everymonth, these Log Sheets should be submittedby the head engineer to the owner company,who in turn should send them to MARICHEMMARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES forfurther evaluation and technical analysis.For more information and literature concerningthe WT Chlori Test Kit measurements and theBoiler Water Treatment program, feel free tocontact the MARICHEM MARIGASES techni-cal department.





173MARICHEM®


®MMMM COOLING WATER TREATMENT TEST KITS

DESCRIPTION

NITRITE TEST KIT has been specificallydesigned to count the nitrite ions concentrationin cooling re-circulating water systems inmarine diesel engines. Its purpose is to testwater sample(s), so we can evaluate the resultsand determine the required use of DIESELCOOLING WATER TREATMENT (D.C.W.T.)NON CHROMATE or D.C.W.T. POWDER, forthe treatment of the water.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

One piece of 1 ml plastic syringe.One piece of 100 ml graduated glass volumetricbeaker.One piece of 1 container reaction zone graduat-ed test strips.

PACKAGING

Order No Unit (in set) Container700104 1 Carton box

TESTING PROCEDURE

1. Extract water sample from the system inquestion.2. With the syringe, draw 1 ml of the sampleand empty into the graduated beaker.3. Fill up to 60 ml of the cylinder's capacitywith fresh water.4. Remove a test strip and seal back the con-tainer immediately.5. Immerse the test strip in the sample solutionfor one second such that the reaction zone isproperly dampened.

6. Remove the strip out from the solution, shakeoff any excess liquid observed and leave it todry for 15 seconds.7. Compare the dry strips' to the color scale andread off the nitrite concentration in ppm.8. Evaluate the founded results against the TestResults Evaluation Table and determine thequantity of D.C.W.T.-NON CHROMATE orD.C.W.T. POWDER to be used.

NOTE: For samples less than 20 ppm nitriteconcentration, supply the system with the pre-scribed dosage as in the chart above.

For samples greater than 80 ppm nitrite concen-tration, drain some quantity of the old water outand make up for that amount with fresh water inorder to bring the system's Nitrite concentrationdown to satisfactory levels.

INITIAL DOSAGE

D.C.W.T. - N.C.:15 litres/ton of fresh waterD.C.W.T. Powder:8 kgs/ton of fresh water


After the test results are obtained, must berecorded in the MARICHEM COOLINGWATER TREATMENT GRAPHIC LOGBOOK. Note that, at the end of every month,the vessel's head engineer must submit theseLog Books to the owner company, who in turnshould submit Log Books to MARICHEMMARIGASES Worldwide Services for furtherevaluation and technical instructions.

NITRITE TEST KIT™

174


For detailed information on safety and health, please refer to Product Label.


MARICHEM®

P A R T I

TEST KITS

FUEL OIL - LUBE OIL TEST KITS

177MARICHEM®


®MMMM FUEL OIL - LUBE OIL TEST KITS

DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM T.B.N. TEST KIT is specificallydeveloped for the determination of T.B.N.-value (alkalinity) of engine oils. It is an excep-tional tool for an engineer onboard when it isnecessary to check for additive degradation,additive depletion and oil grade. The simplicityand accuracy of the tests provide quick andvaluable results.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

The MARICHEM T.B.N. TEST KIT consists ofthe following parts:A. Accessories

-Sturdy case.-Reaction vessel.-Manometer and injection valve for theReaction vessel.-5 and 10 ml graduated plastic syringes with atip.-Magnetic stirrer and magnet. (optional)B. Reagents

-T.B.N. test solution.-Water-free diluent.

PACKAGING

Order No Unit (in set) Container720211 1 Sturdy case

TESTING PROCEDURE

1. Open the reaction vessel and add 5 ml dilu-ent using a clean 5 ml syringe.2. Add 10 ml of the oil sample into the reactionvessel using a clean 10 ml syringe. Add themagnet and close the reaction vessel. Open thevalve by turning the base ring counterclockwiseto position "O".3. Fill a clean 10 ml syringe with 10 ml of theT.B.N. reagent. Insert the syringe into the valveand inject the contents into the reaction vessel. 4. Remove the syringe and wait for 10-15 sec-onds before closing the valve. Then close thevalve by turning the base ring clockwise toposition "S" before removing the syringe.5. In case a magnetic stirrer and a magnet areused place the reaction vessel on the magneticstirrer and switch the stirrer on. Otherwiseshake by hand. After 15 minutes read off themanometer pressure value and record it.

TEST RESULTS EVALUATION

Once the pressure value is recorded, consult theT.B.N. Graph Table in order to determine theT.B.N.-value (alkalinity) content. The T.B.N. Graph Table can be found inside thesturdy case together with an index for the inter-pretation of the results.

MARICHEM T.B.N. TEST KIT™

178




179MARICHEM®


®MMMM

DESCRIPTION

One of the most important items with respect toonboard testing is the water content in lube andfuel oils. The MARICHEM W.I.O. TEST KITenables marine engineers to test engine oils,gear oils, hydraulic oils, etc, whilst also check-ing on water leakages, lube oil separation andoperational contamination in a quick and thor-ough way.The test method is simple and gives accurate re-sults, based on the reaction of water with cer-tain reagents, which finally determine the qual-ity of water in oil.

TEST KIT CONTENTS

The MARICHEM W.I.O. TEST KIT consists ofthe following parts:A. Accessories

- Sturdy case.- Reaction vessel.- Manometer and injection valve

for the Reaction vessel.- 5 and 10 ml graduated plastic syringes

with a tip.- Magnetic stirrer and magnet (optional).B. Reagents

- Water test solution.- Water-free diluent.

PACKAGING

Order No Unit (in set) Container720101 1 Sturdy case

TESTING PROCEDURE

1. Shake the sample to be tested thoroughly inorder to obtain a homogeneous mixture.Immediately add 5 ml of the oil sample into thereaction vessel using a clean 5 ml syringe.

2. Add 5 ml of the water-free diluent using aclean 5 ml syringe. Also add the magnet if amagnetic stirrer is to be used.3. Close the reaction vessel, swirl carefully andopen the injection valve by turning the base ringcounterclockwise to position "O".4. Shake the water test reagent bottle thor-oughly until a homogeneous mixture isobtained. Take 0.75 ml of the water test reagentusing an 1 ml clean syringe and inject into thetest vessel.5. Close the valve by turning the base ringclockwise to position "S" before removing thesyringe.6. Shake the test vessel in regular intervals andread off the value on the manometer after 10-12minutes time.7. In case a magnetic stirrer and a magnet areused, place the reaction vessel on the magneticstirrer and switch the stirrer on. Let it stir forapproximately 10-12 minutes and record themanometer reading.

TEST RESULTS EVALUATION

After the manometer value, from steps 6 and/or7, is recorded, calculate the water content asfollows:

[ Meter Reading (% Vol) x 5 ]Water % Vol. =

Sample Volume Taken (ml)

NOTE

If the water content of the sample is above1.24% volume, open the cover, reduce the sam-ple and repeat the test with a smaller amount ofoil.


MARICHEM W.I.O. TEST KIT™

180




MARICHEM®

EQUIPMENT

183MARICHEM®


®MMMM DOSING SYSTEM

DOSING SYSTEM™

DESCRIPTION

Sea water-cooling circuits are exposed to scal-ing, corrosion and fouling by marine organismsand bacteria. On their own, any of the above,can cause problems, but when they are com-bined, the problems are magnified; this cancause severe system damage, resulting in oper-ational failure and high repair/maintenancecosts. As a result, the DOSING SYSTEM hasengineered to feed treatment chemicals by grav-ity through a flow meter. It has been carefullydeveloped to ensure a constant controlled flowrate and a long feeding time, both of whichshould applied when using EVAPORATORTREATMENT for scale control, OXYCON-TROL for corrosion prevention, MARICHEMS-Fe for fouling prevention and MARICHEMC.C.I. for its condensate corrosion inhibitors, sothat they can all treat and maintain the system inquestion.

COMPONENTS

- One, 100 litre, high-density polyethylenecylindrical tank, specified to be used only forchemical products.

- One, high quality, long life adjustable flowmeter.

- Suitable number of valves, connectors and fit-tings.

- Appropriate length of high standards poly-propylene or reinforced nylon tubing, suitablefor use with chemical products.

DOSING

For EVAPORATOR TREATMENT

EVAPORATOR TREATMENT is directlypoured into the DOSING SYSTEM, which isregulated to dose at an initial rate of 15-35ml/ton of distilled water per day. In the presenceof scale deposits the flow must be increased to

30-70 ml/ton of distilled water per day. Thefeeding, must take place through the vacant sideof the evaporator connected between the seawa-ter supply line and the evaporator unit.

For OXYCONTROL Treatment

OXYCONTROL is poured into the DOSINGSYSTEM, which initially must be regulated tosupply the system at a rate of 1.2 litres/ton ofthe boiler's water. After 48 hours time, the flowmust be increased to 0.3 litres/ton of the boiler'swater on a daily basis. Thereon, the flow is reg-ulated according to the test results obtainedusing the SULFITE TEST KIT. The feeding,must be done by introducing the DOSINGSYSTEM tubing into the boiler's feed pumpsuction line or into the hot well, which is belowthe water level and close to the feed pump suc-tion unit.

For MARICHEM S Fe Treatment

MARICHEM S Fe is poured to fill the DOS-ING SYSTEM, which is positioned above thepump seawater suction unit, over the seawaterlevel, tapped to the main suction filters whichend up into the main seawater cooling system.The flow can be regulated at 0.5 litres ofMARICHEM S Fe for 5-250 tons/hour seawa-ter pump suction capacity, 1.00 litre for 250-500 tons/hour seawater pump suction capacity,1.50 litres for 500-750 tons/hour seawaterpump suction capacity and 3.00 litres for 750-1500 tons/hour seawater pump suction capacity.IMPORTANT NOTICE:

Note that MARICHEM S Fe should not be fedinto a system during the period at which seawa-ter is being drawn.

For MARICHEM C.C.I. Treatment

After the necessary quantity of MARICHEMC.C.I. is determined, it must be poured into theDOSING SYSTEM, when then is regulated to

184

dose at a flow rate of 1 litre for every 10 tons ofboiler water. This rate must be maintained on adaily basis. The setting of the DOSING SYS-TEM must be such so that its tubing is intro-duced to any of the following points:

Condensation pump discharge.Deaerator storage tank.Hot well tank.Condensation return tank.

Discharge of the solution must then be initiatedby regulating the system flowmeter to the aboveprescribed rate.

DOSING SYSTEM




185MARICHEM®


®MMMM pH MEASURING TAPE

DESCRIPTION

pH MEASURING TAPE measures the negativelogarithm of the effective hydrogen-ion concen-tration or hydrogen-ion activity in gram equiv-alents per liter of aqueous solutions used inexpressing both acidity and alkalinity on a scalewhose values run from 0-14 with 7 representingneutrality, numbers less than 7 increasing acid-ity, and numbers greater than 7 increasing alka-linity.

CHARACTERISTICS

- Round shape plastic tape holder with remov-able head.

- Includes a 0-14 built-on color indicator/testevaluation table.

- 4.8 meters of paper tape (yellow color).- Tape is easy to pull and cut, thus achieving

quick and easy results.- Carton box packaging for extra protection.

TESTING PROCEDURE

- Tear off a strip of paper measuring tape andinsert for a few seconds into the solution thatis to be tested. In cases with highly viscous orstained liquids and suspensions, the substanceshould be dripped onto the paper tape.

- The wet paper tape should now be comparedwith the color scale.

- Note that possible discoloration of the drynew papers may be caused by their high sen-sitivity against pH action. This does notimpair the efficacy of the measuring paper

tapes for pH determinations. - With very weak buffered or non-buffered

solutions, the so-called indicator error occurs.This may be compensated up to a certainpoint in the following manner: Place the papertape against the inner wall of the test tube, fillthe test tube with the liquid solution, enoughso, that the liquid reaches to the top edge ofthe paper strip. Leave the test paper in the testtube and let it stand submerged for approxi-mately 30 to 60 seconds. At the end, comparethe color of the test paper with the color scalethrough the test tube glass.

pH MEASURING TAPE™

186

pH MEASURING TAPE

For detailed information on safety and health, please refer to Product Label.


MARICHEM®

HIGH PRESSURE MACHINES

P A R T I I

189MARICHEM®


®MMMM

MARICHEM HIGH PRESSURE MACHINESare revolutionary, multi-purpose and low costmachinery distinct for high quality, optimal per-formance and dual operation of water andwater-sand blasting.These machines are designed exclusively topressurize the water supply in order to washobjects or surfaces eligible to be treated by themechanical action of pressurized water jet andby the possible chemical action of liquid deter-gent additives.The liquid detergent additives must be chosenin accordance with the chemical compatibilityof the surface to be washed. Moreover, highpressure machines are capable to use water andsand blends for the treatment of rust deposits onmetal surfaces, which require water-sand blast-ing.MARICHEM HIGH PRESSURE MACHINESare simple, with easy operation and handling,also equipped with ceramic heads to allow theuse of fresh water and seawater.Note that, before shutdown, after the use withseawater, the jet system should be rinsed

through with fresh water, in order to avoid scaleclogging and corrosion.MARICHEM HIGH PRESSURE MACHINESare extremely effective and long lasting,designed with major priority upon safety. They include a built-in adjustable by-passvalve, assisting to variable regulation of watervolume.

Applications

• Cleaning of the air cooler in the main engine.• Cleaning of the bilges in the engine room.• Cleaning of the boilers after chemical treat-

ment.• Cleaning of the ballast, wing and cargo tanks

from mud, rust and other dirt.• Rust removal from metal surfaces with high

pressure.• All-purpose use requiring high-pressure appli-

cations offering the option to switch fromhydro sand blasting and vice versa.

• Ability for high pressure cleaning with waterand chemical product mixtures.



190


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Model MAR/9215 MAR/9020 MAR/3016

Working Pressure Bar/psi 270/3900 300/2900 160

Water Consumption L/min 15 15 14

Plunger Pump Pistons 3 3 3

Motor Capacity KW/HP 7.5/10 5.5/7.5 4.0/5.5

Electric current Volt/Hz 3X220/380 ~50Hz

3X220/380 ~50Hz

3X220/380 ~50Hz

Length mm 700 640 600

Width mm 550 550 380

Height mm 950 430 440

Weight Kg 95 64 48

Model Working pressure (bar/psi)

Water

Consumption (L/min)

Plunger Pump

(Pistons)

Motor Capacity (KW/HP)

Electric current

(Volt/Hz)

Length (mm)

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (Kg)

1015 150/2200 15 3 4.0/5.5 3X220/380 ~50Hz

1060 740 730 135

1016 160/2400 14 3 4.0/5.5 3X220/380 ~50Hz

1060 740 730 135

1018 170/2600 18 3 5.5/7.5 3X220/380 ~50Hz

1060 740 730 150

1019 150/2200 21 3 5.5/7.5 3X220/380 ~50Hz

1060 740 730 150

1020 200/2900 15 3 5.5/7.5 3X220/380 ~50Hz

1060 740 730 150

70BM 70/100 8 3 Honda Benzin 2.2 HP 450 270 400 24

MARICHEM’s long experience and the customer’s needs have proved that the following jet typesare most popular to accomplish all cleaning tasks a vessel requires.

Additionally, MARICHEM offers a more specific range of jet machines in order to satisfy use onpurpose and use to fit demands.

200/2900

191MARICHEM®


®MMMM HIGH PRESSURE MACHINES

P r e c a u t i o n s• It is recommended to shut down the unit when not in use. This way, machine life is elongated and

safety conditions are ensured.• Biodegradable detergents with pH value between 7 and 12 should preferably be used.• The maximum water inlet temperature, must not exceed 60ºC (140ºF).• The water supply should be connected to the inlet port by means of a reinforced hose (min. 15

bar/200psi) with internal diameter of no less than 13 mm (1/2").• The machine must be fed with clean water only. Running the unit without water or with dirty and/or

sandy water mixtures, may cause serious damage to the jet system.• High-pressure water jet pipes or guns must not be directed against humans and/or sensitive equip-

ment.• This machine is built in compliance with the requirements of the current safety regulations.

Whatever is the use of any electrical appliance, the user must follow some basic rules:- To avoid touching electrical parts or components.- Qualified personnel only must conduct all operations of inspection, maintenance and/or repair.

1. Sand blasting instrument.

2. High pressure outlet (water with sand).

3. High pressure water.

4. Pressure control valve.

5. Water inlet.

6. Sand inlet.

7. Sand for sand blasting.

8. Electric cable for 380/440V

Presentation of water-sand blasting

MARICHEM®

ANTI-POLLUTION KITS & EQUIPMENT

P A R T I I I

195MARICHEM®


®MMMM ANTI-POLLUTION KITS AND EQUIPMENT

OIL CLEAN KIT™

DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM OIL CLEAN KIT is a completeunit of mixed equipment specifically made touse on board merchant vessels in conjunctionwith MARICHEM OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER /MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT forcleaning up spills at sea, on board and/or atshore by the vessel's crew. MARICHEM OILCLEAN KIT is engineered, designed and man-ufactured in cooperation with OIL DRI CORP.of U.S.A., under high quality standards in orderto fulfill IMO and OPA 90 regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS

According to OPA 90 U.S. Coast Guard regula-tions, paragraph 155205, tanker vessels whichare 400 ft. or greater in length, must provide oilspill cleaning equipment on board equivalent tohandle 12 barrels of oil spill. Tanker vesselssmaller than 400 ft. in length and all dry cargomust provide oil spill cleaning equipment onboard equivalent to handle 7 barrels of oil spill.

196

ANTI-POLLUTION KITS AND EQUIPMENT

7 Barrel Oil Clean Kit

A. Sorbents

B. Instruments- One spraying unit- One 5 gallon Oil Spill Emulsifier or

Marichem Oil Spill Dispersant container- Six sets of protection suits and boots- One non-sparking shovel- One non-sparking rake- Mops

- One heavy duty wringer- Four units of non-sparking scoops- One non-sparking hand scraper- One heavy duty squeegee 24 inches wide by 5 feet

handle rod- 50 heavy duty disposal plastic bags/Bale- One High Density Polyethylene storage equip-

ment box, 1.70m X 1.07m X 0.74m

TEST KIT CONTENTS

12 Barrel Oil Clean Kit

A. Sorbents

B. Instruments- One spraying unit- One 5 gallon Oil Spill Emulsifier or

Marichem Oil Spill Dispersant container- Six sets of protection suits and boots- One non-sparking shovel- One non-sparking rake- Mops - One heavy duty wringer

- Four units of non-sparking scoops- One non-sparking hand scraper- One heavy duty squeegee 24 inches wide by 5 feet

handle rod- 50 heavy duty disposal plastic bags/Bale- Two High Density Polyethylene storage equip-

ment boxes, 1.70m X 1.07m X 0.74m

197MARICHEM®



APPLICATION AND USE

In the event of an accidental Oil Spill, immedi-ate action is required in order to avoid unneces-sary spreading of the spill to the surroundingareas. Therefore, a swift response to treat theproblem is of vital importance, this will dependon the reaction time of the assigned crew teamfor such a situation. The cases in which an oilspill must be cleaned are at sea, on board and/orat shore.

A. At Sea

1. Throw a surface oil spill boom over the spill. 2. Approach the contaminated area havingavailable the Boom, the pillows, the pads, theplastic disposal bags, the spraying equipmentand the OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER orMARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT.3. Contain the spill by connecting the boomfragments and throw in the water such asaround the spill (if the spill is small use the pil-low sorbents).4. Slowly pull the boom containing the spillclose to the hull of the vessel.5. Lay the pads over the spill so that they coverall the contaminated area and leave it to absorbas much oil as possible.6. Draw and dispose of used oil pads in the plas-tic disposal bags, if necessary, repeat procedurewith more pads.7. Clean the left over oil contaminants on theseawater surface by spraying a sufficient quan-tity of the OIL SPILL EMULSIFIER orMARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANT,enough, so as to cover the contaminated area.8. Leave to act for a few minutes and mix byapplying plenty of water using a high-pressurewater source (i.e. water hose).9. Leave the seawater surface to settle. 10. Repeat the application of the OIL SPILLEMULSIFIER or MARICHEM OIL SPILLDISPERSANT if necessary.B.On Board

1. Wear the protection suit.

2. Approach the contaminated area havingavailable the shovel, the rake, the mops, thewringer, the scoops, the scraper, the squeegee,the plastic disposal bags, some absorbent pads,the absorbent roll (if the spill is big) and thespraying unit along with the OIL SPILLEMULSIFIER or MARICHEM OIL SPILLDISPERSANT. 3. Consider the size of the spill and lay over itenough pads or a few meters of the roll to coverthe contaminated area.4. Collect the used oil pads and/or roll and dis-pose in the plastic disposal bags.5. Scrap the left over oil waste and use the toolsmentioned above to properly dispose in theplastic disposal bags.6. Clean the free of oil contaminated surface byapplying with the spray unit, the OIL SPILLEMULSIFIER or MARICHEM OIL SPILLDISPERSANT and leave it to act for a fewminutes.7. Wash with plenty of water using a high-pres-sure water source.8. Repeat the application of the OIL SPILLEMULSIFIER or MARICHEM OIL SPILLDISPERSANT if necessary.C. At Shore

1. Wear the protection suit2. Approach the contaminated area havingavailable absorbent pads and roll, the cleaningequipment and the OIL SPILL EMULSIFIERor MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPERSANTspraying unit and solution.3. Follow steps 3-8 of the cleaning procedure asdescribed at the "On-board" process foundabove.NOTES:

- Wherever the use of OIL SPILL EMULSI-FIER or MARICHEM OIL SPILL DISPER-SANT cannot be avoided, try to use in a con-trolled matter.- It is suggested, if possible, to fight oil spills bymeans of absorbents only. Other conventionalways are strongly prohibited.

198





DESCRIPTION

Marichem Marigases Oil Boom 1 is the newlydeveloped boom from our company. It is madefrom heavy-duty vinyl polyester that is resistantto heavy sea conditions, abrasion, harshweather, marine life growth and chemical dis-persants products.


Design ingenuity, product quality and customersatisfaction are built into every single boom.We are proud and stand behind every one of ourproducts, as they have all the safety certificatesand approvals required by the Marine Industry,plus, availability for immediate shipmentworldwide; these factors have helped makethem unique in the international market.Marichem Marigases Oil Booms are all fullyequipped with anchor points, handles, galva-nized ballast chains and custom logos.

The main advantages of our booms, amongstothers, are the following: - Continuous bottom tension and draft for best

performance- Flexibility and lightweight- Strength and reliability- Constant freeboard regardless of wind and

swells- Conformance to wave surface motion- Designed for constant freeboard and high

buoyancy

Marichem Marigases Oil Boom 1 is approvedfor use from the Greek Ministry of MerchantileMarine according to EU regulations.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The Technical specifications for MarichemMarigases Oil Boom 1 are as following:

Typical length of one part50 m

Total height of the boom900 mm

Freeboard200 mm

Draught700 mm

Material the boom is made ofWaterproof wax cloth from polyester.

Colour of the wax clothOrange

Components of the boomAnchors, buoys, nautical keys, ropes, belts, fi-breglass rods, chains, handgrips.

Type of connectionMarine shackles

"Walls" upright backingWith fibreglass rods of 900 mm height.

"Walls" horizontal backingWith two belts, one on the top part of the boomand one on the middle and with one 12 mmchain at the bottom part of the boom.

Handgrips (on the top part of the boom)One handgrip per meter of the boom.

199MARICHEM®



MARICHEM MARIGASES OIL BOOMS™

200


For detailed information on safety please refer to Product Label.


DESCRIPTION

MARICHEM OIL SPILL ABSORBENTS arethe pre-eminent choice you may make whenyou require the optimum cleanup or the mosteffectual oil removal from land or water. Theyare the best solution around for two reasons: (1)they are convenient and lightweight in theirhandling and (2) they are also very cost-effec-tive. Moreover, they can absorb up to 25 timestheir own weight in petroleum products.


- They are equally effective in absorbingpetroleum based solvents and paints, veg-etable oils and other non-water soluble chem-icals.

- Marichem Oil Spill Absorbents are easy todeploy, this can save time and money.

- They do not absorb water, float continuously(not immersible), are wringable, dustless,unaffected by temperature, flame resistant andimpervious to both rot and mildew.

- Polypropylene, the non-toxic environmentalmaterial, is the main ingredient in MarichemOil Spill Absorbents.

- They are approved for use according to the lat-est EU regulations.

The available range of Marichem Oil SpillAbsorbents is as follows:

1. Pads 100/Pads 200

These pads are designed to absorb solventbased products, but not water, they float onwater and are used for absorbing petroleum-based fluids. Furthermore, they can be used onland or water and they are recommended for useon oil spills. These oil absorbents are alwayseasy to place and retrieve. Our pads come in thefollowing types:

Pads 100 (100 pieces of pads together)

Technical characteristics for Pads 100:Product Code: 711001Dimensions : 16´´ W x 19´´ LPackaging : 100 pads/baleBale Weight : 8.6 kgr/bale

Pads 200 (200 pieces of pads together)

Technical characteristics for Pads 200Product Code: 712001Dimensions : 16´´ W x 19´´ LPackaging : 200 pads/baleBale Weight : 8.6 kgr/bale

2. Boom 510

Boom 510 absorbents are plastic net tubes filledwith sorbent material. The boom is flexible,thus it can be adapted to fit in waste water orholding ponds. Connectors at each end allowthe linking together of several booms so as toprovide a continuous chain of protection, allow-ing containment and absorption of the spill.This oil absorbent boom may be left deployedalmost indefinitely.It is the ideal product for emergency spills onwater. It absorbs petroleum-based fluids. Ourboom comes in the following size: Boom 510 (5 inch diameter)

Technical characteristics for Boom 510:Product Code: 710402Dimensions : 5´´D x 10´ LPackaging : 4 booms/baleBale Weight : 9.6 kgr/bale

3. Roll 30

It is a sorbent material that can be used for thelaying over and covering of the area contami-nated by oil. Also, it has been constructed with

201MARICHEM®



OIL SPILL ABSORBENTS™

202

flexible planning, so it is ready to be cut intoany desirable configuration or to be trans-formed into any eligible size, for use aroundindustrial equipment to protect floors from oilor chemical leakage. Furthermore, this specificproduct is advisable for over sprays next toleaky equipment.

Technical characteristics for Roll 30:Product Code : 710403Dimensions : 30´´W x 150´ LPackaging : 1 roll/baleBale Weight : 6.8 kgr/bale

4. Pillow 10P

They are sorbent materials packed into openweave poly-mesh bags that allow passage of oilfor more complete saturation. Pillow 10P isideal for use in bilge areas of ships and also forabsorbing oil spills in seawaters. Thanks to theattached clips at the Pillows sides, each onemay be joined with many others; this makestheir use and removal uncomplicated.

Technical characteristics for Pillow 10PProduct Code : 710401Dimensions : 8´´D x 18´´LPackaging : 10 pillows/baleBale Weight : 8 kgr/bale

5. Pom Pom

Pom Poms were developed for the recovery(absorbance) of crude oil. They can operateeven in subfreezing conditions and will recoverbetween 20 and 60 times their own weight, theamount recovered depends on the viscosity ofthe oil. Pom Poms are the best solution in orderto absorb heavy oil spilled on the water andshorelines. Furthermore, they constitute anexcellent oil adsorbent solution for recovery ofviscous oils on piers, bulkheads, marsh androcky shoreline environments. Amongst theirother numerous advantages, it is worth men-tioning that Pom Poms are especially designedfor viscous oil clean up and are non-toxic, non-scattering, wringable, inert and they are appli-cable in both small and large oil spills.

Technical Characteristics for Pom Pom:Product Code : 710404Dimensions : 16´´D x 4´´LPackaging : 200 pom poms/baleBale Weight : 2.6 kgr/bale





MARIGASES®

SECTION A : GASES AND CYLINDERS

PART I. WELDING GASES & REFRIGERANTS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE & STORAGE OF CYLINDERS ................................... 204ACETYLENE ........................................................................................................ 205OXYGEN .............................................................................................................. 207ARGON ................................................................................................................ 209ARGON - CO2 MIXTURES ................................................................................... 211NITROGEN ........................................................................................................... 213REFRIGERANTS .................................................................................................. 215SPAN - GASES ..................................................................................................... 217

PART II. GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

CENTRAL GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM ....................................................................... 221NITROGEN HIGH PRESSURE SUPPLY SYSTEM ............................................... 225REFRIGERANT RECOVERY SYSTEM ................................................................. 226

SECTION B : GAS WELDING EQUIPMENT - ACCESSORIES

PART I. GAS WELDING & CUTTING EQUIPMENT

WELDING & CUTTING MAIN EQUIPMENT

GAS WELDING & CUTTING KIT .......................................................................... 229WELDING TORCH HANDLE ................................................................................ 2303 TUBE CUTTING ATTACHMENT 90 DEGREES ................................................. 230NOZZLE RETAINER NUT ..................................................................................... 232CUTTING NOZZLES ............................................................................................ 232WELDING ATTACHMENTS ................................................................................. 233O - RING SET ...................................................................................................... 233CUTTING ROLLER GUIDE ................................................................................... 234SPANNER ............................................................................................................ 234CUTTING CIRCULAR BAR AND CENTER ........................................................... 234CLEANING NEEDLES .......................................................................................... 234REGULATORS FOR GAS CYLINDERS ............................................................... 235CONTENT AND WORKING GAUGES ................................................................. 237FLASHBACK ARRESTORS ................................................................................. 237CYLINDER TOP VALVES ..................................................................................... 239VALVE PROTECTION CAP .................................................................................. 239

MARIGASES HOSES AND FITTINGS

HOSES ................................................................................................................. 239JOINTS FOR GAS HOSES ................................................................................... 240QUICK COUPLINGS ............................................................................................ 241WELDING GOGGLES 50 mm FLIP FRONT ........................................................ 242WELDING GOGGLES 50 mm SOFT FRAME ..................................................... 242COVER LENS 50 mm DARK ............................................................................... 242COVER LENS 50 mm CLEAR ............................................................................. 242GAS LIGHTER ...................................................................................................... 242SPARE FLINTS SET OF 10 pcs. .......................................................................... 242GAS WELDING CABINET ..................................................................................... 243

PART II. GAS WELDING & BRAZING CONSUMABLESMARIGASES GAS WELDING AND BRAZING RODS AND FLUXES .................... 247 MARIGASES FLUXES .......................................................................................... 247MARIGASES RODS ............................................................................................. 248

GASES DIVISION

SECTION C : ARC WELDING MACHINES AND ACCESSORIES

PART I. ARC WELDING MACHINES

MARIGASES 14 ................................................................................................... 251MARIGASES 16 HIGH FREQUENCY ......................................................................... 253MARIGASES 35 ................................................................................................... 255MARIGASES 35N .................................................................................................. 257MARIGASES MGI-30 ............................................................................................ 259

PART II. ARC WELDING ACCESSORIES

WELDING CABLE ................................................................................................ 263CABLE CONNECTORS ....................................................................................... 263ELECTRODE HOLDERS & GROUND CLAMPS ................................................... 264FACE SHIELDS ................................................................................................... 264SPARE LENSES ................................................................................................... 265PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ................................................................................... 265WIRE BRUSH ..................................................................................................... 265CHIPPING HAMMER ......................................................................................... 265HEATED ELECTRODE QUIVERS ........................................................................ 265TIG WELDING EQUIPMENT, PARTS AND CONSUMABLES ............................. 266ARC WELDING CABINET ................................................................................... 267

SECTION D : ARC WELDING ELECTRODES

ELECTRODES FOR UNALLOYED STEELS AND MILD STEELS

MGPR ….............…............….………………………...………………............................ 271MGPO ………..........................………………………………………………..............……. 272MHOP ………....…............................…….....……………………………………………. 273

ELECTRODES FOR UNALLOYED AND LOW ALLOYED STEELS

MLH ……………......................…………….........................…………................……… 274MLHH ………………….............................…………………...................………........…. 275MLHL …………………................................…………………...................…......………. 276 MLHR ……………....................................……………………......……………........…… 277MLHT ……………......................................……………………......………………......… 278MLHV ……………......................................……………………......………………....…… 279MSPECIAL ……..........………..........……………………......…....................…............. 280

ELECTRODES FOR STAINLESS STEELS

MDUPLEX .............................................................................................................. 281MSS 18/8V ………………......…………....................………………........…....………… 282MSSM 23/14 …………........................………………………..............…...………….… 283

ELECTRODES FOR CAST IRON

MNICKEL ……………………….....................…………………...................……........…. 284MNiFe ………..........……………………………............……........................…..........… 285

ELECTRODES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ON STEEL

MCH ……........................................…...............…...................……...................…. 286MTENSILE …..............................………………….............…….......................……… 287MIMPACT ……..........................…………………………….....................….……........... 288MWEARMAX ……......................………………………….................….…….................. 289

ELECTRODES FOR COPPER, BRASS, BRONZE AND ALUMINUM

MALBRONZE ........................................................................................................ 290MALUMINUM ........................................................................................................ 291MTINBRO ............................................................................................................... 292

MARIGASES®

WELDING GASES & REFRIGERANTS

P A R T I

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AND STORAGE OF CYLINDERS

1. Never cause cylinders to bump to each other.

2. Never drop a gas cylinder, either full or empty.

3. Never lift or pull gas cylinders by the valve cup or valve top.

4. Always ensure that the cylinders are stored in an upright position, safely lashed or fastened, inorder to prevent their fall.

5. Never strike and/or expose a cylinder to high temperature, Ox/Ac flame from a torch or any othersource.

6. Cylinders must be stored and used at temperatures less than 45°C (113°F).

7. During storage, oxygen cylinders must always be separated from acetylene cylinders by a distanceof minimum six (6) meters, unless a fire proof barrier is erected. Provide adequate ventilation at alltimes.

8. Avoid denting, cutting or other action which might damage the cylinder's body or the top valve.Furthermore, ensure that the cylinders are stored in safe distance from any objects likely to causedents, cuts or other damages.

9. Never use any tools to force open a cylinder's top valve. If the valve cannot be opened by handput the cylinder aside and notify Marigases.

10. Never attempt to fill cylinders or transfer gas from one cylinder to another. This may cause seri-ous accidents.

11. Never attempt to repair or modify any cylinder parts. Do not change or obliterate initials orstamps engraved or cast on the cylinder body. For safety reasons, cylinder maintenance should onlybe carried out by authorized Marigases personnel. Any defected cylinders must be tagged and putaside unused and returned to Marigases at the earliest opportunity.

12. Always make sure that the threads on the regulator or outlet union to be connected correspondto the threads of the top valve. Forcing the connections may damage the top valve threads and causeleakage.

13. Always return cylinders with some positive gas pressure. Be sure that the valves are closed afteruse to avoid contamination.

14. Never use gas cylinders as rollers or other mechanical purposes /actions except for its designat-ed use.

15. Always report faults and irregularities upon return of the cylinders to Marigases.

WELDING GASES AND REFRIGERANTS

205MARIGASES®


®MMMM

ACETYLENE

ACETYLENE (C2H2) is a slightly lighter than air, colorless gas, witha distinct garlic-like odor. When mixed with Oxygen, it gives flametemperatures up to 3100°C (5.612°F). It is spontaneously combustiblein air, at pressures above 2 BAR (30 psi).- Boiling point: -83.8°C (-118.8° F).- Trade name: Acetylene.

Precautions• Although it is non-toxic, acetylene is anesthetic if inhaled. Acetylene

concentrations higher than 20% can cause unconsciousness, so areasof storage and use should always be well ventilated.

• Acetylene is explosive when mixed with air, however large or smallthe quantity. Explosive reactions may occur on ignition. It reactsexplosively with halogens and halogenated compounds and will form an explosive compound withcopper; therefore, equipment containing more than 65% copper should not be used. Acetylene isalso not compatible with mercury or silver.

• Storage temperature should be kept under 54°C (130°F).• For cutting and welding, safety goggles or glasses must always be used.

CYLINDER TYPE AC-40

Cylinder Capacity (water) Liters 40 Gross Weight - kg (Lbs) 72 (158.73) Nominal Tare Weight – kg (Lbs) Tare S: 65.2 (143,7) Nominal Outside Diameter - mm 229 Overall length - mm 1357 Color Maroon (red) Valve Type Forged Brass

Valve outlet Connection W 26.4 mm 1/14 RH Int.

Product Content at 15o C, 1ATU Cubic Meters (Feet) 6.23 (220) kg (Lbs) 6.8 (15) Nominal Filling Pressure at 15 o C - Bar (PSI) 15 (218) Cylinder Test Pressure at 15 o C - Bar 60

Cylinder Approvals BS 6061 BS 5045-1-MN

AC-40 cylinder Order No. 324001 AC-40 gas refill Order No. 330201

Te

ch

nic

al d

ata





206


207MARIGASES®


®MMMM

OXYGEN

OXYGEN (O2) is a gas heavier than air, colorless, odor andtaste free. Although it is a non-flammable natural born gas oxy-gen, can still enforce combustion.Boiling point: -182.97°C (-297.35°F).Trade name: Oxygen.

Precautions• Grease, oil or other flammable materials, may react violently

on contact with oxygen under pressure. Therefore, they mustnever mix with any welding or cutting equipment. Moreover,oxygen must never be used as a substitute for compressed airin pneumatic equipment, since this type of equipment con-tains flammable lubricants.

• Storage temperature should be kept under 54°C (130°F).Moreover, areas of storage should be dry and well ventilated.

• Breathing high concentrations of O2, causes symptoms ofhyperoxia, which in some cases may be fatal.

• For cutting and welding, safety goggles or glasses must be used.

CYLINDER TYPE OX-40

Cylinder Capacity (water) Liters 40 Gross Weight - kg (Lbs) 60.5 (133.4) Nominal Tare Weight - kg (Lbs) 52.2 (115) Nominal Outside Diameter - mm 230 Overall length - mm 1337 Color Blue Valve Type Forged Brass with nickel bursting disc

Valve outlet Connection W 21.8 mm 1/14 RH Ext.

Product Content at 15oC, 1ATU Cubic Meters 6.23 Cubic Feet 220 kg (Lbs) 8.3 (18.2) Nominal Filling Pressure at 15 oC - Bar (PSI) 147 (2132) Cylinder Test Pressure at 15 oC - Bar 250

Cylinder Approvals BS 5045/1/CM DOT 3AA-2132

OX-40 cylinder Order No. 324002 OX-40 gas refill Order No. 330202

Te

ch

nic

al d

ata





208

209MARIGASES®


®MMMM WELDING GASES AND REFRIGERANTS

ARGON

ARGON (Ar) is a slightly heavier than air, colorless andodor free gas. It is an inert gas, commonly used as ashielding gas for the Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG) welding,primarily to clean the molten pool. It is non-toxic andnon-combustible.Trade name: Argon.

Precautions• As with all inert gases, argon displaces oxygen in non

ventilated areas, this can cause asphyxiation and death.Therefore, areas of storage and use should always bewell ventilated and have the possibility for a fast evac-uation. In addition, precautions should be taken in orderto avoid any leakage.

• Store temperature should be kept under 45°C (113°F).• For welding, safety goggles or glasses should be used.

CYLINDER TYPE ARGON-50

Cylinder Capacity (water) Liters 50 Gross Weight - kg (Lbs) 97.6 (215.2) Nominal Tare Weight - kg (Lbs) 81.2 (179) Nominal Outside Diameter - mm 231.5 Overall length - mm 1664 Color Grey Valve Type Forged Brass with nickel bursting disc


Product Content at 15o C, 1ATU Cubic Meters 10.3 Cubic Feet 364 kg (Lbs) 16.4 (36.1) Nominal Filling Pressure at 15 o C - Bar (PSI) 200 (2900) Cylinder Test Pressure at 15 o C - Bar 300

Cylinder Approvals BS 5045 DOT 3AA/ICC 3AA

Argon-50 cylinder Order No. 325011 Argon-50 gas refill Order No. 330211

Te

ch

nic

al d

ata





210


211MARIGASES®


®MMMM

ARGON - CO2 MIXTURES

ARGON-CO2 mixtures are very useful in MIG/MAGwelding as shielding gases.MARIGASES 80-20 mixture (80% Argon and 20%CO2) is ideal for welding the unalloyed and low-alloyedcarbon steels.It protects the molten pool against contaminants in theatmosphere.

Precautions• Store temperature should be kept under 45°C (113°F).• For welding, safety goggles or glasses should be used.

CYLINDER TYPE ARGON - CO2

Cylinder Capacity (water) Liters 50 Gross Weight - kgs (Lbs) 97.6 (215.2) Nominal Tare Weight - kgs (Lbs) 81.2 (179) Nominal Outside Diameter - mm 231.5 Overall length - mm 1664 Color Grey/Yellow Valve Type Forged Brass with nickel bursting disc




Argon-CO2 cylinder Order No. 325012 Argon-CO2 gas refill Order No. 330212

Te

ch

nic

al d

ata





212

213MARIGASES®



NITROGEN

Nitrogen (N2) is a colorless, tasteless, and an odorless free inertgas, slightly lighter than air; it is used for purging tanks andpipelines and for the removal of moisture from refrigeration sys-tems. It does not react with any substance or gas and is non toxic.Nitrogen is also non combustible and does not burn nor does itaffect the respiratory system. It is slightly soluble in water andmost other liquids and is a poor conductor of heat and electricity.It can also used for providing a safe blanket for cargo, preventingreactions with Oxygen.Trade name: Nitrogen.Precautions• As with Argon, Nitrogen displaces Oxygen in non ventilated

areas, this can cause asphyxiation and in prolonged cases, even death. Therefore, areas of storageshould always be well ventilated and have the possibility for a fast evacuation for your staff.Extra precautions should be taken to avoid the possibility of leakages.

• Storage temperature should be kept under 45°C (113°F).

CYLINDER TYPE NITROGEN-50

Cylinder Capacity (water) Liters 50 Gross Weight - kg (Lbs) 92.7 (204.3) Nominal Tare Weight - kg (Lbs) 81.2 (179) Nominal Outside Diameter - mm 231.5 Overall length - mm 1664 Color Green Valve Type Forged Brass with nickel bursting disc




NITROGEN-50 cylinder Order No. 325031 NITROGEN-50 gas refill Order No. 330231

NITROGEN-50 (99,999) gas refill Order No. 330232

Te

ch

nic

al d

ata



214

REFRIGERANTS

MARIGASES™ supplies a wide range ofrefrigerants worldwide. HCFCs and HFCsozone friendly refrigerants are available in mostof the ports, for short notice supplies.

R-22

R-22 is used in all types of shipboard refrigera-tion. It is available for low, medium and hightemperatures applications (ET-40/+160°C). Inline with international agreements on the man-agement of ozone depleting chemicals, use ofR-22 is progressively phased out across theworld. Regulated by the Montreal Protocol,1987.

R-134a

R-134a is an environmentally friendly refriger-ant introduced as a replacement for CFCs (R-12). It has an ozone depletion potential (ODP)of zero and can be used in many applicationsthat currently use R-12. However, equipmentdesign changes are sometimes required to opti-mize the performance of R-134a in these appli-cations. It is also available for medium andhigh-temperature applications (ET-20/+25°C).

R-401A

(R-401A) Replaces R-12 A HCFC-based refrigerant. It is a quick, easyand cost-effective retrofit refrigerant for R-12(Regulated by the Montreal Protocol, 1987).Works over the entire R-12 operating range (ET-30/+13°C). It is also available for low-temper-ature R-12 applications where higher capacityis needed.

R-404a

R-404a is intended as replacement for R-502 inmedium and low-temperature refrigeration sys-tems (ET-45/+8°C). It is a mixture based on all-HFC refrigerants, which results in no ozonedepletion factor.


215MARIGASES®


®MMMM

DISPOSABLE CYLINDER13,60 Kg.

R-407c

(R-407c) Replaces R-22 A long-term HFC replacement for HCFC-22 inpositive displacement equipment. R407c offerssimilar performance to R-22 and can be used toretrofit existing R-22 air-conditioning equip-ment (similar to R-22 in capacity and energyefficiency). It is available for low, medium andhigh temperature applications (ET-25/+13°C).

R-410a

(R-410a) Replaces R-22 A long-term HFC replacement for R-22 in pos-itive displacement of air-conditioning equip-ment. It is available for low, medium and hightemperature applications (ET-45/+8°C) but as ahigher-pressure refrigerant than R-22 andshould be used only in equipment specificallydesigned for R-410a. R410a offers improvedperformance over R-22.

R-507

(R-507) Replaces R-502 A long-term HFC replacement for R-502 inrefrigeration equipment. It is available for lowand medium temperature applications (ET-45/+8°C). It can be used in new and existing R-502 equipment. However, retrofit costs will behigher due to the required conversion to polyolester (POE) lubricant hence, mostly used innew systems.

Other Refrigerants such as R-401a, R-507, andR-409a are available upon request. All theabove refrigerants are also available uponrequest in small disposable cylinders.


216




217MARIGASES®



SPAN - GASESMARIGASES offers a wide variety of multi-purpose Span - Gases.They are efficiently used for calibration of gas detection systems.MARIGASES guarantees the component mixtures in all their avail-able Span - Gases:

LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) standard value is 35%.

CYLINDER TYPE SG - 10

Cylinder Capacity (water) Ltr. 10

Application Calibration

Nominal Tare Weight - kg (Lbs) 39.6 (87.30)

Cross weight - kg (Lbs) 20 (44)

Nominal Outside Diameter - mm 140

Overall length - mm 1000

Color Black/Orange

Valve Type Forged Brass with bursting disc, inlet filter and positive pressure cartridge

Valve outlet Connection W 24.32 mmX1/14"

Gas capacity (kg) 1.6

Gas capacity (nM3) 1.5

Nominal Filling Pressure (Bar) 150

SPAN - GAS WATER CAPACITY

ORDER Number

Ammonia (NH3 5.25 % VOL.) in Air 35 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330241 Butane (C4H10 0.63 % VOL.) in Air 35 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330243

Ethylene (C2H4 0.95 % VOL.) in Air 35 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330244

Methane (CH4 2.5 % VOL.) in Air 50 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330245

Propane (C3H8 0.74 % VOL.) in Air 35 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330246

Propylene (C3H6 0.70 % VOL.) in Air 35 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330247

Vinylchloride (C2H3Cl 1.33 % VOL.) in Air 35 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330248

Butane (C4H10 0.57 % VOL.) in Air 30 % LEL 10 Ltr. 330249 Order number: 330141

Te

ch

nic

al d

ata





218

MARIGASES®

GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

P A R T I I

221MARIGASES®


®MMMM

CENTRAL GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM

MARIGASES central gas supply system consists of the cylinders, the cylinder batteries with theconnecting hoses, the cylinder holders, the gas outlet stations and the pipeline network. A central gassupply system offers several major advantages:

• With cylinder batteries having two header pipes, there is no work interruption at cylinder exchange.• Important gas reserve and better utilization of cylinder content.• Higher stability of working pressure than with a single cylinder.• Safety in the work area by elimination of high-pressure fittings.• Better survey of gas consumption and gas reserve.• Reduced costs with accelerated cylinder rotation.• Central surveillance of gas reserve.

1. Gas cylinder2. Cylinder top valve3. High pressure hose or coupling spiral4. Cylinder battery5. Cylinder battery6. Cylinder battery

The cylinder batteries include:• Header pipe (color sprayed) with stop valves.• Header pipe support (zinc plated).• Master manifold valve.• Wall bracket.


7. Central pressure regulator8. Cylinder holder9. Cylinder holder

10. Cylinder protection cap11. Distribution pipeline

222

Batteries are available for two and four cylinders (2 for acetylene and 4 for oxygen) or for three andsix cylinders (3 for acetylene and 6 for oxygen).

MARIGASES gas outlet station is designed to ensure maximum safety and high grade efficiency. Itincludes a high quality twin valve unit and two flashback arrestors (one for oxygen and one foracetylene) complete with nuts and fittings.

The gas outlet station is recommended to be protected in a cabinet. MARIGASES offers a steel safe-ty cabinet (color sprayed), which completely encloses the gas outlet equipment. Its external dimen-sions are (H x W x D) mm: 600 x 450 x 300.


GAS OUTLET STATIONOrder number: 332605

GAS OUTLET STATION SIGNS

ACETYLENE OXYGEN

GAS UNDER PRESSUREREMOVE BOTTLES IN CASE OF FIRE

NO ADMITTANCE

GAS DANGERFire, open light and smoking prohibited

WORKING PRESSUREUse the following pressures from the outlet station:

Welding: Acetylene 0.3 kg/cm²Oxygen 0.3 kg/cm²

Cutting: Acetylene 0.2 kg/cm²Oxygen from 1.7 kg/cm²

IMPORTANTPRESSURE ON OUTLET SIDE OF REGULATORS

TO BE SET AT MAXIMUM:Oxygen: 8 kg/cm²

Acetylene: 0.8 kg/cm²

ATTENTIONKEEP OUTLET POINT VALVES CLOSED WHEN

OUTLETS ARE NOT IN USE

223MARIGASES®


®MMMM GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

224


2 CYLINDER HOLDEROrder number: 332615

OXYGEN HIGH PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE Order number: 332722

ACETYLENE HIGH PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSEOrder number: 332621

2 CYLINDER BATTERY(left or right)Order number: 332610

3 CYLINDER BATTERY (left or right)Order number: 332611






225MARIGASES®


®MMMM GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

NITROGEN HIGH PRESSURE SUPPLY SYSTEM

N2 CYLINDERS

MANIFOLD PIPES

PADDING NET PURGING NET

REGULATOR

REGULATOR

SAFETY VALVES

The MARIGASES NITROGEN HIGH -PRESSURE SUPPLY SYSTEM is used tocompensate the loss of Nitrogen during thevoyage and to ensure a safe position pressure ofat least 0.07 bar in the cargo tanks (paddingoperation).It is also used to provide the Nitrogen neededfor the purging operation, when required.

Nitrogen is a colorless, odor and flavor free,non-toxic and almost totally inert gas.

Nitrogen padding is used to exclude oxygenfrom the cargo tanks to prevent dangerous situ-ations and maintain the quality of the cargo.

Another use of Nitrogen, is purging and drain-ing pumps, cargo pipes and valves, air coolingsystems etc. The MARIGASES NITROGEN HIGH PRES-SURE SUPPLY SYSTEM consists of manifoldpipes, cylinder holders, cylinder hoses and areducer cabinet. The reducer cabinet is used forreducing the cylinder pressure to 5-10 bar,appropriate for distribution. It includes regula-tors with built in safety relief valves, inlet/out-let closing valves and two outlets, one for purg-ing and one for padding. Manifold pipes can beconnected together in order to form a connectorpipe. Cylinders are connected to manifold pipesvia non-return valves.

REFRIGERANT RECOVERY SYSTEM

MARICHEM MARIGASES has integrated the latest technology and incorporated state of the artfeatures while having reliability and speed in order to provide a Complete Refrigerant RecoverySystem that complies fully with US, EU and IMO regulations.

According to the United States Environmental Protection Agency the venting to atmosphere of allClass I and Class II ozone-depleting substances (i.e. CFC/HFC) is strictly prohibited under Section608 of the Clean Air Act. Hence, in order to avoid the former common practice of refrigerant vent-ing during routine servicing the Refrigerant Recovering Unit has become mandatory.

MARICHEM MARIGASES offers a Complete Refrigeration Recovery System that fulfills the pre-mentioned requirements. This system is beneficial as it reduces the amount of ODSs (OzoneDepleting Substances) such as R-12, and global warming gases, such as R-134A, from entering theenvironment. There are also cost benefits involved such as lower refrigerant purchasing and thereduction need of using 3rd party contractors to carry out refrigerant recovery during maintenanceor repair.

PRODUCTS FOR REFRIGERANT RECOVERY:

RECOVERY CYLINDEROrder Number:380006

RECOVERY UNIT WITH CONNECTION KITOrder Number: 333101/110V, 50 Hz - 333102/220V, 60 Hz

ELECTRONIC CHARGING SCALEOrder Number: 333104

ELECTRONIC / UV LEAK DETECTOROrder Number: 333106

VACUUM GAUGE, DIGITALOrder Number: 333105

VACUUM PUMP (110V - 220 V, 50-60 Hz)Order Number: 333103

4-WAY MANIFOLDIN SPECIAL PROTECTIVE CASEOrder Number: 333092


226

MARIGASES®

P A R T I

GAS WELDING AND CUTTING EQUIPMENT

229MARIGASES®


®MMMM GAS WELDING AND CUTTING EQUIPMENT

WELDING & CUTTING MAIN EQUIPMENT (SWISS MADE)

GAS WELDING & CUTTING KIT

The MARIGASES gas welding and cutting kit is aSwiss made high quality set containing all the toolsand components required for gas welding, cutting andbrazing on board. All components are designed withsafety in mind. They guarantee top performance andreliability, under the toughest working conditions. Ourheavy-duty torch ensures maximum resistance againstflashbacks and offers flexibility, as it can be used bothfor brazing and welding plates.The MARIGASES gas welding and cutting kitincludes a cutting roller guide and a circular bar withcenter tap, for special cuts. It covers a welding rangeup to 30 mm and a cutting range up to 100 mm. The equipment is available as a complete set or as indi-vidual parts with additional available special acces-sories, covering practically all forms of welding, cut-ting, soldering and heating.

Dimensions (mm): 470W X 21L X 9HWeight (kg): 7,10

Order number: 332468

230

In detail, MARIGASES kit contains the following components:

GAS WELDING & CUTTING KIT COMPONENTS Order number

1. Torch handle (complete with sockets & nuts 3/8”) 3324692. 3 Tubes cutting attachment 90° 3324703. Nozzle retainer nut 3326504. Cutting nozzle 3-10 mm 3324795. Cutting nozzle 10-25 mm 3324806. Cutting nozzle 25-50 mm 3324827. Cutting nozzle 50-100 mm 3324818. Welding attachment No 1 0.5-1 mm 3324719. Welding attachment No 2 1-2 mm 33247210. Welding attachment No 3 2-4 mm 33247311. Welding attachment No 4 4-6 mm 33247412. Welding attachment No 5 6-9 mm 33247513. Welding attachment No 6 9-14 mm 33247614. Welding attachment No 7 14-20 mm 33247715. Welding attachment No 8 20-30 mm 33247816. Spare O-ring set 33250217. Welding attachment nut 33265118. Cutting roller guide 33248419. Spanner 33249920. Cutting circular bar and center 332483

Cleaning needles 332585Caring metallic case

WELDING TORCH HANDLEOrder number: 332469

Standard handle in forged brass, withaluminum grip. It guarantees highdurability, solid construction andeasy handling. This handle accom-modates all welding, cutting andheating attachments, supplied byMARIGASES.

THREE TUBES CUTTINGATTACHMENT 90 DEGREESOrder number: 332470

It includes lockable oxygen lever andcovers a cutting range up to 200 mm.


231MARIGASES®


®MMMM

WELDING TORCH


232


CUTTING ATTACHMENT

NOZZLE RETAINER NUTOrder number: 332650

Spare nut for the 3 Tubes Cutting Attachment 90°.

CUTTING NOZZLESMARIGASES high performance cutting, mix type nozzles, for high cutting speed:

CUTTING NOZZLE 3 - 10 mmOrder number: 332479




233MARIGASES®



WELDING ATTACHMENTSMARIGASES offers a wide range of 8 high quality-welding attachments:

WELDING ATTACHMENT 0.5 - 1 mmOrder number: 332471

WELDING ATTACHMENT 1 - 2 mmOrder number: 332472




WELDING ATTACHMENT 9 -14 mmOrder number: 332476



O - RING SETOrder number: 332502

A set of 5 spare O - rings for the gas welding and cutting kit.

234


CUTTING ROLLER GUIDEOrder number: 332484

A roller guide for accurate cutting lines.

SPANNEROrder number: 332499

A useful tool for multi - purpose use.

CUTTING CIRCULAR BAR AND CENTEROrder number: 332483

Circle cutting attachment with adjustable point for circlecuts from 80 up to 800 mm diameter.

CLEANING NEEDLESOrder number: 332485

A practical set of nozzle cleaners for the welding and cut-ting kit, which cover a wide range of cutting nozzles andwelding attachments.

235MARIGASES®



REGULATORS FOR GAS CYLINDERS

MARIGASES pressure regulators include pres-sure and contents gauges and/or flowmeters,integrated safety valve and shut-off valve. Theyare made of forged brass and are of a very solidconstruction. They ensure stable working pres-sure without any follow up adjustment. They areeasy to use, with large, comfortable adjustmentknobs and are suitable for all compressed gasesand gas mixtures. MARIGASES cylinder regula-tors are designed for maximum reliability andsafety of use.

PRESSURE/FLOW ADJUSTMENT RA NGES PRODUCT WORKING CONTENT

REGULATOR FOR ACETYLENE CYLINDER 0 - 2.5 Bar 0 - 40 Bar Order number: 332486

REGULATOR FOR OXYGEN CYLINDER 0 - 16 Bar 0 - 315 Bar Order number: 332487

REGULATOR FOR ARGON/NITROGEN CYLINDER

0 - 16 Bar 0 - 315 Bar Order number: 332640

REGULATOR FOR ARGON/NITROGEN WITH FLOWMETER 16

0 - 16 L/min 0 - 315 Bar Order number: 332645

REGULATOR FOR ARGON/NITROGEN WITH FLOWMETER 32

0 - 32 L/min 0 - 315 Bar Order number: 332646

Oxygen regulator

Nitrogen - Argon regulator with flow meter 0-16 or 0-32 ltr/min

Acetylene regulator

236


Technical data Connection: screw connector for cylinder.Outlet: hose connector 3/8", 1/4", 1/2".

Regulator type Compressed airInlet pressure (bar) 200Working pressure (bar) 10Performance (Nm³/h) 30

Precautions Fat, oil or grease should not be used on oxygen regulators (see alsoprecautions for oxygen in page 207).

237MARIGASES®


®MMMM

CONTENT AND WORKING GAUGES

MARIGASES offers a wide range of spare content and working gauges for Acetylene and Oxygen:

CONTENT GAUGE FOR ACETYLENE (0-40 bar)Order number: 332490

WORKING GAUGE FOR ACETYLENE (0-2.5 bar)Order number: 332491

CONTENT GAUGE FOR OXYGEN, NITROGEN, ARGON (0-315 bar)Order number: 332492

WORKING GAUGE FOR OXYGEN, NITROGEN, ARGON (0-16 bar)Order number: 332493

FLASHBACK ARRESTORS

FLASHBACK ARRESTORS are safety, flame arresting devices, used to protect both line regulatorsof central gas supply systems and pressure regulators of single cylinders. Normally, flames resultingfrom flashback will stop in the torch. However, in case of wrong manipulation, incorrect mainte-nance or use of gas welding equipment, the gas flames may pass back through the hoses and evenreach the cylinder. MARIGASES flashback arrestors ensure maximum safety as they are manufac-tured in conformity with DIN and international standards along with certifications from BAM, SVS,DVGW, ON.

Flashback arrestors incorporate several safety functions:

• Gas non-return valve, to prevent reverse flow of gases.• Flame arrestor, to quench the flame of a flashback.• Temperature sensitive cut-off valve, to prevent further gas supply in case of fire.


CONNECTOR GAS TYPE PRESSURE P max. BAR

FLOW RATE V max. m3/h INLET (FEMALE) OUTLET (MALE)

Oxygen Nitrogen Argon

15 140 3/8" 3/8"

Acetylene 1.5 16 3/8" L 3/8" L

238


FLASHBACK ARRESTOR FOR OXYGEN CYLINDEROrder number: 332488

FLASHBACK ARRESTOR FOR ACETYLENE CYLINDEROrder number: 332489

Technical specification ................................................................................

239MARIGASES®



There are also availablethe following flashback arrestors: FLASHBACK ARRESTOR FOR OXYGEN HOSE


FLASHBACK ARRESTOR ON HANDLE 3/8” LOrder number: 332588

FLASHBACK ARRESTOR FOR ACETYLENE HOSEOrder number: 332569

FLASHBACK ARRESTOR ON HANDLE 1/4” ROrder number: 332589

CYLINDER TOP VALVES

There are 3 different typesof spare top valves: TOP VALVE ACETYLENE


TOP VALVE OXYGENOrder number: 332466

TOP VALVE NITROGEN, ARGONOrder number: 332464

VALVE PROTECTION CAPOrder number 332467 Fits all MARIGASES cylinders.

MARIGASES HOSES AND FITTINGS

HOSES

MARIGASES hoses are designed for maximum safety and durability. They are manufactured in con-formity with ISO 3821 and DIN 8541 standards. Smooth cover hoses, which are highly resistant tokinks and abrasion. Excellent to use with all gases and gas mixtures.

OXYGEN HOSE 1/4” (6.30 mm) BLUEOrder number: 332495

ACETYLENE HOSE 1/4” (6.30 mm) REDOrder number: 332496





240


Twin hoses correspond to a red hose for acetylene and ablue one for oxygen flow. These two hoses are bondedtogether.

TWIN HOSE 1/4” (6.30 mm) RED/BLUEOrder number: 332494



JOINTS FOR GAS HOSES

Screw couplings are supplied in sets. Each set is completewith two hose sockets, nuts (for connection to gas regula-tor), torch and a connection stub. Nuts and stubs foracetylene are marked with a groove and their threads areleft-handed in order to avoid incorrect use.

OXYGEN HOSE JOINT 1/4” (6.30 mm) ROrder number: 332500

ACETYLENE HOSE JOINT 1/4” (6.30 mm) LOrder number: 332501

OXYGEN HOSE JOINT 3/8” (9.50 mm) ROrder number: 332560

ACETYLENE HOSE JOINT 3/8” (9.50 mm) LOrder number: 332561

241MARIGASES®



QUICK COUPLINGS

MARIGASES quick couplings are designed for quick connection of the hoses with cylinder regula-tors and outlet stations. They ensure maximum safety, without gas leakage and fit easily by usingman-hand power only. There are different types of quick couplings for each gas (Oxygen, Acetylene), so as to be impossi-ble to use it with a wrong gas. Additional safety is provided, as quick couplings automatically shut-off gas flow, when the sidetowards the regulator is disconnected.

There are the following types of quick couplings:

For connecting on to the pressure regulator:

QUICK COUPLING FOR OXYGEN REGULATOROrder number: 332585

QUICK COUPLING FOR ACETYLENE REGULATOROrder number: 332586

For connecting hoses:

QUICK COUPLING FOR OXYGEN HOSEOrder number: 332581

QUICK COUPLING FOR ACETYLENE HOSEOrder number: 332582

For connection on the torch handle:

QUICK COUPLING FOR OXYGEN TORCHOrder number: 332583

QUICK COUPLING FOR ACETYLENE TORCHOrder number: 332584

242


WELDING GOGGLES 50 mm FLIP FRONTOrder number: 332562

MARIGASES heavy-duty protective glasses with flip upframe. They are soft and comfortable, with ventilation slotsto prevent glasses from fogging. These goggles aredesigned for full protection against sparks and spatter.Complete with two pairs of lenses, a plain and a colored one.

WELDING GOGGLES 50 mm SOFT FRAMEOrder number: 332503

This is MARIGASES light version of welding goggles withone pair of lenses. They are available with plain or dark pairof glasses. Moreover, they are efficiently operational due toanti fog design.

COVER LENS 50 mm - DARKOrder number: 332504

Two spare colored lenses, that can be used with both weld-ing goggles flip front and welding goggles soft frame.

COVER LENS 50 mm - CLEAROrder number: 332505

A plain, high visibility spare lens that can be used with bothwelding goggles flip front and welding goggles soft frame.

GAS LIGHTEROrder number: 332506

MARIGASES lighter is easy to use, light, with large sparksthat guarantee one touch ignition.

SPARE FLINTS SET OF 10 pcs.Order number: 332507

A set of 10 spare high quality flints, to use with gas lighters.

243MARIGASES®


®MMMM

GAS WELDING CABINET

GAS WELDING CABINET is a complete store for all necessary MARIGASES rods, fluxes, equipment &accessories required for gas welding & cutting on board. Convenient design, easy to use, made of galvanizedsteel plates. It is suitable for new shipbuildings but can be adapted into existing vessels as well. Additionally,MARIGASES offers specific enquiries or specialized design requirements. Consult our service engineers orsales representatives for details. Each Full Cabinet consists of the following.


MARIGASES®

GAS WELDING & BRAZING CONSUMABLES

P A R T I I

247MARIGASES®


®MMMM

MARIGASES GAS WELDING AND BRAZING RODS AND FLUXES

Each type of MARIGASES rods iscarefully selected for specific gaswelding and brazing jobs. Our rangecovers all applications that mayoccur on board. MARIGASES rodsare packaged in practical sealedcontainers, which assure factoryfreshness. On each container there isa label with full details about the useand the product. Moreover, whereappropriate flux coated rods can beused in order to ensure best weldingproperties and performance. In addi-tion, a range of fluxes is available;each one assigned to exactly matchthe characteristics of specific rods.For better results it is recommendedto remove any residual flux afterfinishing work, as most fluxes arecorrosive.

MARIGASES FLUXES


FLUX TYPE WEIGHT ROD APPLICATION ORDER NUMBER ALUMINUM BRAZING POWDER

250 gr A (Aluminum - Silicon) 332533

BRONZE BRAZING POWDER

250 gr Bronze Alloy & Bronze Fluxcoated 332532

SILVER BRAZING POWDER 250 gr S60 & S45 Silver Alloys 332531

WEARBRO BRAZING POWDER

250 gr Wearbro FC Rod 332959

248


MARIGASES RODS

MARIGASES®

P A R T I

ARC WELDING MACHINES

251MARIGASES®


®MMMM ARC WELDING MACHINES

MARIGASES 14The new inverter generator from MARIGASES for welding with coated elec-trodes (MMA) as well as with non-consumabletungsten electrode (TIG) with contact startingsupplies 140 amps, 35%, at 40°C with a record-breaking power/weight ratio.The innovative technology of the power stage(Patented) and the special care in construction,has allowed the weight and overall size to bereduced without affecting the reliability and theperformance; that, have put this generator at thetop of its category.MARIGASES 14 conforms in all aspects to theEuropean Standard EN60974-1 (equivalent tothe International Standard IEC974-1) on electri-cal welding safety and the strict EuropeanStandard EN50199 on electro-magnetic com-patibility. The application of these standards allows thewelding machine to gives the operator maxi-mum safety in use.MARIGASES as a company has a professionaldistribution network available as a further con-firmation of the product and service quality thatthe client using the MARIGASES 14 and otherMARIGASES products will be able to benefitfrom.

MMA WELDING

The microprocessor automatically provides ahot start and an increase in the current at thetime of short-circuiting between the electrodeand the weld pool (arc-force) make the weldingeasier, smoother and of higher quality, evenwith particularly difficult electrodes.If, in spite of all, the electrode clings to thepiece to be welded, the anti-sticking functionallows you to prevent damage to the electrodeholder.You can weld rutile and basic metal electrodesof 1.5 mm to 4.00 mm (the 3.25 mm electrodes

can be welded without interruption at 100A) aswell as cast iron, aluminium and stainless steel.

TIG WELDING

The contact start of the MARIGASES 14 hasbeen especially designed to reduce to the mini-mum the tungsten inclusions in the material tobe welded and thus obtain a quality of jointwhich is comparable to the most expensivewelders with high-frequency start; this consid-erably reduces the electromagnetic interferencefrom these products that, in certain workingconditions are not tolerated. The arc is particu-larly stable and allows high precision welding,even on thin sheet.


252


MARIGASES 14 ADVANTAGES

- Professional welding machine.- Low consumption of electrical energy:

only 2,1KW for electrodes of 3,25 to 40%.- Can be used in severe environmental conditions:

low contamination of control board by dustprotection rating IP23.

- Shock-resistance plastic.- Light to carry:

only 4,1 kg.; extendible belts.- Easy to set and to adjust.- Excellent welding characteristics with electrodes:

start always easy (hot-start), welding beadalways fluid (arc-force), Ion-glasting.Electrode-holder (anti-sticking).

- In TIG welding the LIFT start ensureslow consumption of the electrode andless tungsten inclusions.

CONTROL PANEL

TECHNICAL DATA

253MARIGASES®



The new inverter generator from MARIGASESfor welding both with coated electrodes (MMA)and with non consumable tungsten electrode(TIG) with contact starting supplies 160 amps,40%, at 40°C with a record-breaking power/weight ratio. The innovative technology of thepower stage (European patent No. 602495) withthe use of the most up-to-date and reliable com-ponents available in the world market (micro-processor, IJBT and SMD components) and thespecial care in construction, has allowed theweight and overall size to be reduced, withoutaffecting the reliability and the performance,that, have put this generator at the top of its cat-egory. Special care and attention has been givento the test run methodology, in order to ensure itoperates under all environmental conditions.The construction methods used give a highdegree of reliability and easy access to the inter-nal components. MARIGASES 16 conforms inall aspects to the European Standard EN60974-1 (equivalent to the International StandardIEC974-1) on electrical welding safety and thestrict European Standard EN50199 on electro-magnetic compatibility; the application of thesestandards gives the operator maximum safety inuse. MARIGASES as a company has a profes-sional distribution network available as a fur-ther confirmation of the product and servicequality that the client using the MARIGASES16 and other MARIGASES products will beable to benefit from.

MMA WELDING

The microprocessor automatically provides ahot start and an increase in the current at thetime of short-circuiting between the electrodeand the weld pool (arc-force) make the weldingeasier, smoother and of higher quality, evenwith particularly difficult electrodes. If, despiteeverything, the electrode stays stuck to the

piece to be welded, the anti-sticking functionallows you to prevent damage to the electroholder. You can weld rutile and basic metalelectrodes of from 1.5 mm to 5 mm (the 3.25mm electrodes can be welded without interrup-tion at 120A) as well as cast iron, aluminiumand stainless steel.

TIG WELDINGwith HF START, solenoid valve & torch trigger

The contact start of the MARIGASES 16 hasbeen especially designed to reduce to the mini-mum the tungsten inclusions in the material tobe welded and thus obtain a quality of jointwhich is comparable to the most expensivewelders with high-frequency starting; this con-siderably reduces the electromagnetic interfer-ence from these products that, in certain work-ing conditions are not tolerated. The arc is par-ticularly stable and allows high precision weld-ing, even on thin sheet.

MARIGASES 16 HIGH FREQUENCY

Order number:332536

254

MARIGASES 16 HF ADVANTAGES

- High Frequency machine.- Automatically adjustable working voltage

from 110V to 230V.- Low consumption of electrical energy:

only 3KW for 160A TIG.- Can be used in severe environmental conditions:

low contamination of control board by dustprotection rating IP23.

- Shock-resistance plastic.- Light to carry:

only 6.9 kg ; extendible belts.- Easy to set and to adjust.- All principal TIG functions are standard:

pulsed current, pulsed currentat mid-frequence and adjustablecurrent down slope (the post-gasis adjustable automatically).

- Excellent electrode welding:Hot-Start and Arc-Forceare adjustable separetly.


CONTROL PANEL

TECHNICAL DATA

255MARIGASES®



MARIGASES 35This inverter generator for welding both withcoated electrodes (MMA) and with non-con-sumable tungsten electrode (TIG) haveextremely high performance contact start withlow weight and small size for easy movementright to the work place. 27 kg of pure power tohand. This has been made possible by the use ofinnovative technology in the power stage(European patent No. 602495) with the use ofthe most up-to-date and reliable componentsavailable in the world market (microprocessor,IJBT and SMD components). A reduction inweight and size, with reliability and perform-ance at levels of excellence! The constructionmethods used give easy access to the internalcomponents. The full electronic panel has pre-set parameters for welding with the most com-mon electrodes and additional functions forTIG welding. MARIGASES 35 conforms in allaspects to the European Standard EN60974-1(equivalent to the International StandardIEC974-1) on electrical welding safety and thestrict European Standard EN50199 on electro-magnetic compatibility; the application of thesestandards allows the welding machine to givesthe operator maximum safety in use. MARI-GASES as a company has a professional distri-bution network available as a further confirma-tion of the product and service quality that theclient using the MARIGASES 35 and otherMARIGASES products will be able to benefitfrom.

MMA WELDING

The hot start and arc-force functions (an instantincrease in the current at the time of short-cir-cuiting between the electrode and the weldpool) make the welding easier, smoother and ofhigher quality, even with particularly difficultelectrodes. If, despite everything, the electrodestays stack to the piece to be welded, the anti-

sticking function allows you to prevent damageto the electrode holder. The high current, theexceptional dynamic response and the consider-able voltage available allow you to weld withrutile, basic metal and cellulose electrodes,even with a large size, as well as cast iron, alu-minium and stainless steel.

TIG WELDING

The contact start of the MARIGASES 35 hasbeen especially designed to reduce to the mini-mum the tungsten inclusions in the material tobe welded and thus obtain a quality of jointwhich is comparable to the most expensivewelders with high-frequency starting; this con-siderably reduces the electromagnetic interfer-ence from these products that, in certain work-ing conditions are not tolerated. The arc is par-ticularly stable and allows high precision weld-ing, even on thin sheet.

Order numbers:332599

(3X400V, 50Hz)332596

(3X440V, 60Hz)

256

MARIGASES 35 ADVANTAGES

- The original resonant power stage and theuse of IJBT has increased the efficiency andcapacity with a lower consumption of electri-cal energy when compared to traditional gen-erators and first generation inverter generators.

- The separate forced air ventilation coolingthe power equipment allows less contamina-tion of the control board by dust.

- The protection rating of IP23 allows it to beused outside.

TECHNICAL DATA


CONTROL PANEL

257MARIGASES®


®MMMM

These inverter power sources for welding bothwith coated electrodes (MMA) and (TIG) haveextremely high performance contact ignitionwith low weight and small size for easy move-ment right to the work place. 24 kg of pure power to hand. This has beenmade possible by the use of innovative technol-ogy in the power stage (European patent No.602495) with the use of the most up-to-date andreliable components available in the world mar-ket (microprocessor, IJBT, and SMD compo-nents). A reduction in weight and size, with reli-ability and performance at levels of excellence!Special care and attention has been given in thetesting, to ensure reliability under all enviro-mental conditions. The constructions methodsused give easy access to the internal compo-nents. MARIGASES 35N offers you the FP126alphanumeric front panel, plus control of thetorch push-button with more possibilities forMMA welding and is specially designed forTIG welding. MARIGASES 35N conforms inall aspects to the European StandardsEN60974-1 (equivalent to the InternationalStandards IEC974-1) on electrical weldingsafety and the strict European StandardEN50199 on electro-magnetic compatibility;the application of these standards allows thewelding machine to conform to the EuropeanCommunity Directives and gives the operatormaximum safety in use.

USEInverter technology, the microprocessor andprecise construction ensure safety and reliabili-ty and a stable, accurate welding arc in everyoperational situation. In real time, the weldingcurrent and voltage readings are supplied toallows you to check its quality, and on shut-down, the last welding condition is memorised.

MMA WELDINGThe (Hot-Start) and Arc-force functions (aninstant increase in the current at the time ofshort-circuiting between the electrode and theweld pool) make the welding easier, smootherand of higher quality, even with particularly dif-ficult electrodes. If the electrode sticks to theworkpiece, the anti-sticking function preventsdamage to the electrode holder. The high cur-rents, the exceptional dynamic response and theconsiderable voltage available allow you toweld with rutile, basic metal and cellulose elec-trodes, as well as cast iron, aluminum and stain-less steel.

TIG WELDINGThe contact start (LIFT) of the MARIGASES35N has been specially designed to reduce tothe minimum tungsten inclusions in the materi-al to be welded, and thus obtain a quality ofjoint which is comparable to the most expensivewelding machines with high-frequency starting;this considerably reduces the electromagneticinterference from these products that, in certainworking conditions, are not tolerated. The arc isparticularly stable, and allows high precisionwelding, even on thin sheet. Thanks to theFP126 alphanumeric panel and connections for


MARIGASES 35N

Order number:332964

258

TIG torch, you get further benefits over andabove the standard version. For MMA welding,the memory has in store optimum weldingparameters for the most common electrodes onthe market. For TIG welding, all contactsbetween tungsten electrode and welding piece-necessary for LIFT arc striking- is always atzero or minimum current, with very low elec-trode wear, and minimum inclusions in the weldpool. In addition to controlling gas flow andcurrent descent ramp, this feature providesmaximum quality at minimum cost for TIGwelding.

APPLICATIONSTheir lightness and compactness allow elec-trode welding even in places that are not easilyaccessible, and make these power sources idealfor:- REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE- SHIPYARDS AND BULDING SITES- SPECIAL MAINTENANCE- NUCLEAR INDUSTRY- PETROCHEMICAL PLANT

ADVANTAGES- Low energy consumption compared to tradi-tional welding machines and first generationinverter power sources.- The separate forced air ventilation cooling thepower equipment allows less contamination ofthe control board by dust.- The microprocessor facilitates parameter set-ting and ensures weld repeatability, and thusweld quality, through time.- Excellent electrode welding: Hot-Start, Arc-Force and Anti-sticking.- Electromagnetic noise cut down to a minimumfor TIG welding.- Drastic cost cutting and great quality for TIGwelding.- Pre-set parameters for MMA welding.- Easy to transport, thanks to its low weight and

sturdy, ergonomic handle.

CONTROL PANELFP126 - Alpha-numeric display - Voltage and currentmeasurement - Memorisation of the status at shutdown -

MMA: regulation of current, hot-start and arcforce, auto-matic anti-sticking functions; preset values for the mostcommon electrodes - TIG: current regulation; withoptional torch button kit: regulation of the downslopetime for the current and of the post-gas time.

TECHNICAL DATA


259MARIGASES®


®MMMM

The new MARIGASES MGI-30 weldinginverter is a three-phase 400-440 V, 50-60 Hzwelding machine, highly suitable for MMA andTIG welding. It is easy to carry (17.2 kgr) andhas a maximum output current of 320A for(MMA) and of 420A for TIG. The MARIGASES MGI-30 welding inverterhas been built with hot start and anti-stick func-tions, this ensures easy strike and a controlledstable arc. MARIGASES also ensure that lift arc is stan-dard and that electronic remote control is nowavailable in all their three phase inverters.Built for professional use, this powerful 60%duty cycle light weight MMA/TIG inverter isgenerator suited. (Generator achievement =capacity X 2).All machine components are lacquered to pro-tect them against environmental influences,such as dust and humidity.To protect against overheating an electronicthermostat has been fitted. Model features include a digital control panel, aplastic handle and a blue front panel.The processes and the areas that this weldingmachine can be used are listed in the tablebelow:

The recommended base metals are Structuralsteels, Cr-Ni steels and Duplex steels.

DESCRIPTION AND PRODUCTSPECIFICATION

INTRODUCTIONThe welding current sources supply constantelectrical current. They are built on INVERTERtechnology with high power and high reliabilityparts and can be used for stick electrode as wellas for TIG welding.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONThe main panel board consists of the currentsource board and the separate control logicboard, both of which are individually replace-able. This system of configuration ensures avery high degree of reliability with simplifiedmaintenance and customer service. The powerelectronics contains an INVERTER operatingat a frequency higher than 50 kHz with a verylow resonance period.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONTECHNICAL DATAThe MARIGASES MGI-30 welding inverterhas a maximum output current of 320 A whenused in MMA welding.It has a maximum output current of 420 A whenis used in TIG welding.


MARIGASES MGI-30

Processes Recommended areas of use MMA Machine & apparatus

construction TIG-DC (Lift arc) Plant construction

Maintenance & repair Rolling-stock construction

260

The first table applies for TIG-welding.The second table applies for MMA-welding.

DEFINITION OF TECHNICALSYMBOLS

IEC 974 EN 60974 supply voltage meets these

international norms.S/N/… Serial number, when you want to

claim your rights you must know the serial number which can be found on every product.

SMAW three phase frequency converter, suitable for welding with coated stick electrodes(MMA welding)

WIG suitable for TIG-weldingU0 secondary ignition voltageX duty cycle in percents.

Percentage share of 10 minutes, during which the machine is able to source given currentwithout overheating.

I2 welding currentU2 secondary voltage with welding

current I2U1 nominal supply voltage1-50/60 Hz single phase supply 50 or 60 HzI1 input supply current at appro-

priate welding current I2. Divide the value of I1 by1.6 for TIG welding

IP23 protection class of metalenclosure

S suitable for working in highdanger areas

Note: the current source construction allowsworking in the 3rd pollution class (IEC 664)

MARIGASES MGI-30 welding inverter iscompliant to the guidelines below:EN 60974-1:1990Arc welding equipment. Part 1: Welding powersources (IEC 60974-1:1998)EN 50199:1995Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)Product standard for arc welding equipment

The national and international guidelines (orpart of them) and other specifications below arewatched:EN 60309-1Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrialpurposes. Part 1: General requirements EN 60309-2Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrialpurposes. Part 2: Dimensional interchangeabili-ty requirements for pin and contact-tube acces-sories.


MARIGASES®

ARC WELDING ACCESSORIES

P A R T I I

263MARIGASES®


®MMMM ARC WELDING ACCESSORIES


WELDING CABLE

MARIGASES welding cable is black neoprene sheathedcable, with high flexibility and copper conductor. Highlyresistant to oil, water, flame and abrasion. It is availablein cross section areas 35, 50 and 70 mm².

WELDING CABLE 35 mm² (300 A)Order number: 332508



CABLE CONNECTORS

MARIGASES cable connectors ensure good electricalconductivity and are suitable for use with either copperor aluminium cable, providing a quick, watertight fit-ting of cables on sight. Two methods of cable fixing areavailable, either by grub screws and copper ferrule orby a gland pressure nut retaining the cable against amachined cone. Special safety connectors are alsoavailable. They are recommended for use under thetoughest conditions.Capacity: 450 Amp.Cable size: up to 70 mm².

CABLE CONNECTOR MALE 35-50 mm²Order number: 332511

CABLE CONNECTOR FEMALE 35-50 mm²Order number: 332512

CABLE CONNECTOR MALE 50-70 mm²Order number: 332513

CABLE CONNECTOR FEMALE 50-70 mm²Order number: 332514

SAFETY CABLE CONNECTORS MALE/FEMALEOrder number: 332630

264


ELECTRODE HOLDERS & GROUND CLAMPS

MARIGASES electrode holders have a ‘D’ section,knurled handle providing a firm grip and good bal-ance. Designed to withstand heat, with shieldedspring to prevent damage from spatter and fixingby means of a bolt.

ELECTRODE HOLDER 400 AOrder number: 332515

ELECTRODE HOLDER 600 AOrder number: 332559

GROUND CLAMPOrder number: 332648

FACE SHIELDS

MARIGASES offers two types of faceshields, for full protection of the welder.Both of them are made of a light, qualityresistant plastic material. The shield withadjustable headband is a full-face protec-tion accessory, appropriate for all weld-ing jobs. The face shield with handle,guarantees full protection of the handholding it. Both shields are equippedwith two high quality glasses, a plain anda colored one. All the glasses complywith the DIN standard.

FACE SHIELD WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD BANDOrder number: 332516

FACE SHIELD WITH HANDLEOrder number: 332517

SPARE LENSES

There are available plain and colored spare lenses. They are 60 X 110 mm and are manufacturedaccording to the DIN standard. These high visibility glasses are available in 9 - 13 DIN standards.

SPARE LENS 60 X 100 mm - DARKOrder number: 332520

SPARE LENS 60 X 100 mm - CLEAROrder number: 332521

PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

MARIGASES protective clothing is made from specially treated soft leather to ensure maximumsafety and comfort. They provide full protection against heat, falling sparks and slag, under thetoughest conditions.

WELDING GLOVES - LEATHEROrder number: 332518

WELDING APRON - LEATHEROrder number: 332519

SPATS LEATHEROrder number: 332570

WIRE BRUSHOrder number: 332522

Ideal for cleaning before welding and also de-slagging. Tempered wire bound to sturdy woodenbacks.

CHIPPING HAMMEROrder number: 332523

All steel with spring taper handle, hard forged head and bright plated finish.

HEATED ELECTRODE QUIVERSOrder number: 332711

For storage of electrode in dry heated environment until themoment of use. Two models are available, 110 Volt or 240Volt both operating from either an A.C. or D.C. supply andare complete with power supply lead and plug.CAPACITY: 7.3 kg (20 lbs) weight of electrodes.MAX. ELECTRODE LENGTH: 450 mm.TEMP. RANGE: 110°C operating at 110 Volts.RATING: 150 Watts.

265MARIGASES®


®MMMM ARC WELDING ACCESSORIES

266

TIG WELDING PARTSAND CONSUMABLES

CERAMIC GAS NOZZLE, 47 mm - shortorder number: 332921

ELECTRODE HOLDER MOUNT dia. 1.6 mmorder number: 332932



ELECTRODE HOLDER dia. 1.6 mmorder number: 332942



WOLFRAM ELECTRODE dia. 1.6 mmorder number: 332952



LONG CAPorder number: 332926

SHORT CAPorder number: 332927


TIG TORCHES

SR17V 4 mfor MARIGASES14/16 - completeorder number: 332911

SR17V 8 mfor MARIGASES14/16 - completeorder number: 332912

SR17A 4 mfor MARIGASES16L/16HF - completeorder number: 332913

SR17A 8 mfor MARIGASES16L/16HF - completeorder number: 332914

SR26V 4 mfor MARIGASES 35 - completeorder number: 332915

SR26V 8 mfor MARIGASES 35 - completeorder number: 332916

TIG WELDING EQUIPMENT, PARTS AND CONSUMABLES

High quality TIG TORCHES suitablefor every type of MARIGASES ARCWELDING MACHINES are offered.Also, parts and TIG electrodes forthe TORCHES are available, in orderto satisfy the necessities of TIGWELDING.

TIG TORCH

267MARIGASES®


®MMMM

ARC WELDING CABINET

ARC WELDING CABINET is a completestore for all popular types and diameters ofMARIGASES arc welding electrodes (MGPO,MGPR, MLH, MLV, MTENSILE, MSS 18/8,MNiFe, MNICKEL). It is suitable for newshipbuildings but can be adapted into existingvessels as well.

Additionally, MARIGASES offers specificenquiries or specialized design requirements.Consult our service engineers for details.

Dimensions: 600 x 600 x 400


Order Number: 333051 - Full / 333052 - Empty

Each Cabinet includes the following electrodes:

MARIGASES®

P A R T I

ARC WELDING ELECTRODES

271MARIGASES®


®MMMM ARC WELDING ELECTRODES

MGPRFor welding of general light structural steels

Applications

Welding of vehicles, machines and light structural steels. Surface dressing of heavy steel structure

Characteristics

MGPR is a high titanium type electrode, whose usability is excellent in all position welding. MGPRis especially suitable for welding of light structural steels because arc stability, slag removal andbead, appearances are good and its penetration is swallow.

Notes on usage

1. Pay attention not to exceed the range of proper currents. Welding with excessive current notonly lowers X-ray soundness, but also causes increase of spatter, undercut and insufficient slagcovering.

2. Dry the electrodes at 70-100°C for 30-60 minutes before use. Excessive moisture absorptionlowers usability and may result in some porosity.

Typical chemical composition of weld metal (%)

Typical mechanical properties of weld metal

Size & recommended current range (AC or DC±)

STANDARDSAWS E 6013KS E 4313JIS D 4313DIN E 4332R3BS E 4332R21

C Mn Si P S0.08 0.38 0.28 0.017 0.011

YPN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

EL%

430(44) 480(49) 29

Dia. (mm) 2.0 3.2L(mm) 300 350

ORDER No. 332534 332573Amp. F 35 - 65 60 - 130

V&OH 30 - 65 60 - 110

272


MGPOFor welding of steel sheets and light structures

Applications

Welding of steel sheet structures in ships, railway vehicles and cars.

Characteristics

MGPO is a high titanium type electrode which provides good usability in all positions, includingvertical downward welding. The arc is stable with little spatter and the lustrous bead can be obtained.MGPO is suitable for welding steel sheets and light structures because of shallow penetration.

Notes on usage

1. In the case of vertical downward welding, manipulate the electrode keeping its tip in contactwith mother plate as shown in the sketch.

2. Pay attention not to exceed the range of proper currents. Welding with excessive current notonly lowers X-ray soundness, but also causes increase of spatter, undercut and insufficient slagcovering.

3. Dry the electrodes at 70-100°C for 30-60 minutes before use. Excessive moisture absorptionlowers usability and may result in some porosity.



Size & recommended current range (AC or DC±)

STANDARDSAWS E 6013KS E 4313JIS D 4313DIN E 4332R(C)3BS E 4332R11

C Mn Si P S0.08 0.38 0.29 0.016 0.012

YPN/mm2

(kgf/mm2)

TSN/mm2

(kgf/mm2)

EL%

440(45) 500(51) 27

Dia. (mm) 2.6 3.2 4.0L(mm) 350 350 400

ORDER No. 332537 332538 332539Amp. V - down 45 - 95 80 - 130 120 - 165

V - UP 45 - 90 80 - 120 120 - 155

273MARIGASES®



MHOPFor highly efficient fillet welding

Applications

Horizontal and flat fillet welding of ship buildings, bridges, structural steels of buildings, generalstructures and a surface dressing of multi-layer welds.

Characteristics

MHOP is an iron powder high titanium type electrode which is designed for the purpose of obtain-ing high efficiency in single pass horizontal and flat welding.It has excellent arc re-striking property and slag is almost selflifting. The head appearance is lus-trous. In case of manual welding the applicable speed ratio is wide from 0.8 to 1.6. As its depositionefficiency and deposition rate are high, extremely high working efficiency can be obtained.

Notes on usage

1. In the case of horizontal fillet welding, manipulate the electrode keeping its tip in contact withthe mother plate as shown in the sketch.

2. In the case of horizontal fillet welding, keep the optimum speed ratio among 1.0-1.5.3. Dry the electrodes at 70-100°C for 30-60 minutes before use because excessive moisture

absorption causes undercuts and irregular heads.



Size & recommended current range (AC or DC+)

C Mn Si P S0.08 0.70 0.35 0.018 0.012

YPN/mm2

(kgf/mm2)

TSN/mm2

(kgf/mm2)

EL%

IVJ (kgf-m)

480(49) 560(57) 28 70(6.9)

Dia. (mm) 3.2 4.0 5.0L(mm) 400 450 450

ORDER No. 332574 332575 332595Amp. H&H-

Fil.100 - 150 140 - 190 200 - 250

STANDARDSAWS E 7024KS E 4324JIS D 4324DIN E 5122RR11BS E 5122RR13034

274


MLHFor high efficient welding of 50kgf/mm² class high tensile strength steel

Applications

Welding of 50 kgf/mm² class high tensile strength steel of ships, bridges and pressure vessels.

Characteristics

MLH is an iron powder low hydrogen type electrode for all-position welding. Its usability is thebest with direct current application as well as alternating current application.

Notes on usage

1. Dry the electrodes at 300-350°C for 30-60 minutes before use.2. Adopt back step method or strike the arc on a small steel plate prepared for this particular pur-

pose to prevent blowholes at the arc starting.3. Keep the arc as short as possible.




STANDARDSAWS E 7018KS E 5016JIS D 5016DIN E 5154B(R)10BS E 5154B11026(H)

C Mn Si P S0.07 0.96 0.61 0.013 0.007

YPN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

EL%

IVJ (kgf-m)-20OC

470(48) 560(57) 32 160(16)

Dia. (mm) 2.6 3.2 4.0L(mm) 350 350 400

ORDER No. 332540 332541 332542Amp. F 60 - 100 90 - 130 130 - 190

V&OH 50 - 80 70 - 130 100 - 170

275MARIGASES®


®MMMM

MLHHFor high resistance with approximate recovery of 155 %

ApplicationsMLHH is a basic type electrode for high resistance with approximate recovery of 155%. Easy to usein flat position by doing contact welding.

CharacteristicsIt is a high recovery electrode. It is suitable for economical filling of large joints sections. It has good bead appearance with low spatter loss. Easy slag removal.

Materials of applicationIt is applied in non alloyed structural steels: St 33, St 34, St 46, St 52, St 50(*), St 60(*), St 70(*) It is applied in fine grained structural steels: St E 255 (St E 26), St E 285 (St E29), St E 315 (St E32), St E 355 (St E36), W St E 255 (W St E 26), W St E 285 (W St E 29), W St E 315 (W St E 32),W St E 355 (W St E 36). Applied, as well, in the following types of boiler plates: H I, H II, H III, HIV (*), 17 Mn 4, 19 Mn 5 (*) It is applied on the ship building steels A, B, C, D, E, as well as on thecast steels GS 38, GS 45, GS 52. N.B.: Where (*), preheat to 150-3000 °C depending on plate thickness.


Typical mechanical properties of all weld metal: (Single values are typical values)

Welding Positions: Horizontal


IMPORTANT NOTICE: Use dry electrodes only.• MARICHEM MARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES reserves the right to modify its products and their packing without priornotice. • The information contained herein is designed to help the user in his choice of product. • The user should check that the cho-sen product is suited to the application he envisages for it. • All above-mentioned data are indicative only.


Product Name C Mn Si MLHH 0.08 0.85 0.45

Heat Treatment Tensile Strength (N/mm2)

Yield Strength (N/mm2)

Elongation (I=5d) (%)

Impact Strength Charpy-v (+200C) (Joule)

As welded 510-610 > 380 > 24 > 100 Stress relieved (5800C/15h/oven)

480-580

> 380

> 24

> 100

Normalized 400-500 > 290 > 28 > 120

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. 333129 2.5 350 50 - 100

MLHH 333130 3.25 450 110 - 160

STANDARDSAWS SFA-5.1 E 7028DIN 1913 E 424 B 73 H5

MLHLFor high tensile, fine-grained structuraland cryogenic steels

ApplicationsMLHL is a low Hydrogen coated electrode used for high tensile, fine-grained structural and cryo-genic steels.

Characteristics- Offers good weldability in all positions. - Weld metal of extremely high metallurgical purity with very low hydrogen content. - Regular seams and easy slag removal. - Welds of X-Ray quality.

Materials of applicationIt is applied in fine-grained structural steels: TStE 255, TStE 285,

TStE 315, TStE 355, TStE 380, TStE 420.

DINAlso applied in cryogenic steels: TT St 35 N, TT StE 35 N 17 173, 17 174

TT StE 35 V, 10 Ni 14.

Typical chemical composition of weld metal (%):


Welding Positions


REBAKING: Required, 2 hours at 300 °C - 350 °C. • MARICHEM MARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES reserves the right to modify its products and their packing without priornotice. • The information contained herein is designed to help the user in his choice of product. • The user should check that the cho-sen product is suited to the application he envisages for it. • All above-mentioned data are indicative only.

276


Product Name C Mn Si P S Ni Cu MLHL 0.05 1.1 0.30 < 0.012 < 0.012 2.4 < 0.09

Tensile Strength (N/mm 2) Yield Strength (N/mm 2) Elongation A 5 (%) Impact Energy (J) ISO -V

520 - 700 > 480 > 22 +200C/170 -600C/80-100

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. 333134 2.5 350 65 - 95 MLHL 333135 3.25 350 90 - 130

STANDARDSAWS SFA-5.5 E 8018 - C 1 DIN 8529 E SY 42 87 2 Ni B H5 EN 499 E 46 6 2Ni B 42 H5

MLHRFor producing non-breakableand tough welded joints

ApplicationsMLHR is a low Hydrogen electrode used for producing crack-free and tough welded joints.It is used for high-tensile fine-grained structural steels.

CharacteristicsThe weld metal is of extremely high metallurgical purity and has good welding ability in all posi-tions. Welds are of X-Ray quality. Low spatter loss. Easy slag removal. Regular seams.

Materials of applicationIt is applied on fine grained structural steels: StE 420, StE 460, StE 500,

WStE 420, WStE 460, WStE 500,TStE 420, TStE 460, TStE 500.



Welding Positions



277MARIGASES®



STANDARDSAWS SFA-5.5 E 8018 - G DIN 8529 EY 50 76 Mn 1 Ni B EN 499 E 50 6 1 Ni B 42 H5

Product Name C Mn Si Ni MLHR 0.06 1.6 0.5 0.9

Tensile Strength (N/mm 2) Yield Strength (N/mm 2) Elongation A 5 (%) Impact Energy (J) ISO -V 590 - 690 > 510 > 23 +200C/200 -600C/60

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. 333121 2.5 350 65 - 95

MLHR 333122 3.25 450 90 - 135

= +

278


MLHTFor welding of 1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo steel

Applications

Welding of 1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo steel used for steam pipes of boilers for electric power plant andrepairing of cast steel, equipment for oil refining industries and high temperature synthetic chemicalindustries.

Characteristics

MLHT is an iron powder low hydrogen type electrode. Owing to this work efficiency, it is most suit-able for welding thick steam pipes and repair welding of cast steel.

Notes on usage

1. Dry the electrodes at 325-375°C for about one hour before use.2. Preheat at 150-300°C and postheat at 670-730°C.



Typical creep rupture strength (690° Cx1hr. S-R)


C Mn Si P S Cr Mo0.08 0.75 0.65 0.015 0.010 1.25 0.51

YPN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

EL%

PWHT

600(61) 690(70) 25 690° Cx1hr S - R

Test Temperature 550° C1000hrs creep rupture strength 202N/mm2 (20.6kgf/mm2)

Dia. (mm) 2.6 3.2L(mm) 300 350

ORDER No. 332593 332594Amp. F 65 - 95 90 - 130

V&OH 60 - 90 80 - 120

STANDARDSAWS E 8018 - B2KS DT2318JIS DT2318DIN ECrMo1B26BS 1CrMoB

279MARIGASES®



MLHVFor vertical downward welding of 50kgf/mm²class high tensile strength steel

Applications

Vertical downward welding of ships, buildings and bridges.

Characteristics

MLHV is a low hydrogen type electrode for exclusively vertical downward welding. Mechanicalproperties and crack resistibility of weld metal are good and slag is self-lifting. As higher amperagecan be used, the efficiency of vertical welding is remarkably improved compared with verticalupward welding.

Notes on usage

1. Manipulate the electrode straight downward without weaving and press its tip against the moth-er plate.

2. Dry the electrodes at 350-400°C for about 60 minutes before use.3. Keep the arc as short as possible.4. Adopt back step method or strike the arc on a small steel plate prepared for this particular pur-

pose to prevent blowholes at the arc starting.




C Mn Si P S0.07 1.05 0.58 0.014 0.010

YPN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

EL%

IVJ (kgf-m)

480(49) 580(59) 31 180(18)

Dia. (mm) 3.2 4.0 5.0L(mm) 400 450 450

ORDER No. 332543 332544 332576Amp. V - down 100 - 160 140 - 210 220 - 270

STANDARDSAWS E 7048KS E 5016JIS D 5016DIN E 5155B9

280

MSPECIALFor assembly work, workshop and repair welding

ApplicationsMSPECIAL is a low Hydrogen double coated multi-purpose electrode used for assembly work,workshop and repair welding.

CharacteristicsIt has outstanding welding ability in A.C. as well as excellent gap bridging properties.



Welding Positions




Product Name C Mn Si MSPECIAL 0.06 0.90 0.70

Tensile Strength (N/mm 2) Yield Strength (N/mm 2) Elongation A 5 (%) Impact Energy (J) ISO -V 470 - 600 > 380 > 20 +200C/150 -200C/100

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. 333126 2.5 350 65 - 90 333127 3.25 450 95 - 150

MSPECIAL 333128 4.0 450 140 - 190

Materials of application

~ = + -

STANDARDSAWS SFA-5.1 E 7016 DIN 1913 E 51 43 B (R) 10 EN 499 E 38 B 12 H 10

MDUPLEXRutile - basic type electrodefor duplex stainless steel welding

ApplicationsMDUPLEX is a Rutile- basic type electrode for welding the duplex stainless steel used in tanks,cargo loading pipes as well as when used as ladder materials on board.

CharacteristicsIt has excellent weldability for filling and for root runs. It is applicable to a service temperature of2500 C. MDUPLEX has high resistance to general, pitting and stress corrosion, as well as to highyield strength.

Materials of applicationIt is applied in the following materials:

It is also applied in dissimilar joints such as alloyed and unalloyed steel to duplex stainless steel.Typical chemical composition of weld metal (%):


Welding Positions PA, PB, PC, PF, PE.Size & recommended current range (AC or DC+)

PROCEDURAL RECOMMENDATIONS: Welding with heat input max. 2.5 KJ/mmPreheat and interpass temperature max 1500 C.• MARICHEM MARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES reserves the right to modify its products and their packing without priornotice. • The information contained herein is designed to help the user in his choice of product. • The user should check that the cho-sen product is suited to the application he envisages for it. • All above-mentioned data are indicative only.

281MARIGASES®



Steel Grades EN 10088 -1/-2 W.Nr X2 CrNiMoN 22 -5-3 1.4462/1.4417 X3 CrNiMoN 27 -5-2 1.4460 Duplex S.S. X2 CrNiN 23 -4 1.4362

PRODUCT NAME C Mn Si Cr Ni Mo N MDUPLEX 0.02 0.80 1.00 22.5 9.5 3.2 0.16

Tensile Strength (N/mm2)

Yield Strength (N/mm2)

Elongation (I=5d) (%)

Impact Strength Charpy-v (-300C)

(Joule) > 550 > 450 > 20 50

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. 333131 2.5 350 40 - 75 MDUPLEX 333132 3.25 350 80 - 110

STANDARDSAWS A-5.4-92 E 2209-16 EN 1600-97 E 22 9 3 NL R 32

282


MSS 18/8 VFor welding of extra-low carbon18% Cr - 12% Ni - Mo stainless steel

Applications

Welding of AISI (SUS) 316L stainless steel.

Characteristics

MSS 18/8 V is lime-titanium type electrode for all - position welding. As the weld metal is ofaustenitic structure containing proper quantity of ferrite crack resistibility is good and usability isalso good.As extra-low carbon weld metal can be obtained, intergranular corrosion resistibility is superior tothat of MSS 18/8 V.Creep rupture strength is also good.

Notes on usage

1. Keep the arc as short as possible and choose the welding current as low as possible.2. Weaving width should be within two and a half times of electrode's diameter.3. When the electrodes have absorbed moisture, dry them at 250-300°C for 60-90 minutes before

use.4. Remove dirt such as oil and dust from the groove.




Product Name C Mn Si P S Cr Ni MoMSS 18/8 V 0.030 1.06 0.70 0.021 0.006 18.50 12.45 2.35

Product Name TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

EL%

MSS 18/8 V 570(58) 45

Dia. (mm) 2.0 2.6 3.2L(mm) 250 300 350

ORDER No. 332545 332546 332577Amp. F 30 - 50 50 - 80 70 - 115

V&OH 25 - 45 45 - 75 65 - 110

STANDARDSAWS E 316L-16JIS D 316L-16DIN E 19123nCR26BS E 19.12.3LR

283MARIGASES®



MSSM 23/14VFor welding of low carbon 22% Cr - 12% Ni - Mo stainless steel

Applications

Build up welding of Cr-Mo steel or carbon steel. Welding of AISI (SUS) 316 or AISI (SUS) 316L to carbon steel. Clad steel side welding to AISI (SUS) 316 or AISI (SUS) 316L.

Characteristics

MSSM 23/14 is lime-titanium type electrodes for all-position welding, which have good usabilityand good weldability. Weld metals provide excellent corrosion resistibility and heat resistibility in the as-welded condition. As MSSM 23/14 is of low carbon content, it can be used for welding of extra-low carbon stainlesssteel which contains Mo and for under laying of mother plates which contain considerably high car-bon content.

Notes on usage

1. Keep the arc as short as possible and choose the welding current as low as possible.2. Weaving width should be within two and a half times of electrode's diameter.3. When the electrodes have absorbed moisture, dry them at 250-300°C for 60-90 min. before use.




STANDARDSAWS E 309Mo -16JIS D309MoL - 16BS E 23.12.2R

C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo0.030 1.20 0.71 0.021 0.006 22.85 13.51 2.35

TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

EL%

630(64) 38

Dia. (mm) 2.6 3.2 4.0L(mm) 300 350 350

ORDER No. 332547 332548 332549Amp. F 50 - 80 70 - 115 100 - 150

V&OH 45 - 75 65 - 110 90 - 140

284


MNICKELFor repairing of cast iron products

Applications

Repairing and filling up of cavities of various kinds of cast iron products such us cylinder covers,motor beds, casings and gears. Repairing of meehanite cast iron, alloy cast iron and malleable castiron

Characteristics

MNICKEL is a graphite type coated electrode, depositing weld metal consisting of almost nickel.Hardening of the weld metal and fusion zone in cast iron is smallest and machining of the welds iscomparatively easy. Therefore, it is suitable for welding alloy cast iron of poor weldability, malleablecast iron and hydraulically pressured parts as well as common cast iron.

Notes on usage

1. Clean base metal before welding.2. If there is a possibility that cracking spreads, make the stopholes at both ends of repairing part.3. Keep bead length less than 50mm to disperse welding heat. Adopt back step, stepping-stone or

symmetry method by turns.4. Hot peen in every pass.5. It is not necessary preheating and postheating in general but satisfactory results can be obtained

by preheating at 100-200°C in accordance with kind, shape and size of base metal.




STANDARDSAWS E Ni-ClKS E GC NiJIS DFC NiDIN E NiG3

C Mn Si P S Fe Ni0.86 0.3 0.28 0.002 0.002 1.85 Rem.

TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

440(45)

Dia. (mm) 2.6 3.2L (mm) 300 350

Order No. 332550 332551Amp. F 60 - 90 80 - 130

285MARIGASES®



MNiFeFor repairing of cast iron products

Applications

For welding of nodular cast iron, repairing and joining of various cast iron products. Also suitablefor underlaying of hardsurfacing.

Characteristics

MNiFe is a graphite type coated electrode whose weld metal has the composition of 55%Ni-45%Fe.As the hardening of fusion zone in cast iron is small and the coefficient of thermal expansion of theweld metal is about the same as that of cast iron, mechanical properties and crack resistibility of theweld metal are good.

Notes on usage

1. Clean base metal before welding.2. If there is a possibility that cracking spreads, make the stopholes at both ends of repairing part.3. Keep bead length less than 50mm to disperse welding heat. Adopt back step, stepping-stone or

symmetry method by turns.4. Hot peen in every pass.5. It is not necessary preheating and postheating in general but satisfactory results can be obtained

by preheating at 100-200°C in accordance with kind, shape and size of base metal.




STANDARDSAWS E NiFe-ClKS E GC NiFeJIS DFC NiFeDIN E NiFe G3

C Mn Si P S Ni Fe0.98 0.8 0.32 0.005 0.004 55.1 Rem.

Dia. (mm) 3.2 4.0L (mm) 350 350

Order No. 332552 332553Amp. F 80 - 120 120 - 150

TS N/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

560(57)

MCHFor chamfering and gouging

ApplicationsMCH are electrodes with special coating for cutting all steel types, grey cast iron and non-ferrousmetal.

CharacteristicsIt is a special covering type of electrode very useful in repair and demolition work

Materials of applicationIt is applied in all steels (particularly for stainless and manganese steels which cannot be cut by theoxy-acetylene process).It can also be applied for cast iron, copper and its alloys.



286


PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. MCH 333133 3.25 450 160-200

~ = +

287MARIGASES®



MTENSILEFor welding of dissimilar metals

Applications

Welding of 29% Cr - 9% Ni cast steel, dissimilar metals such as carbon steel or low alloy steel toaustenitic stainless steel. Welding of AISI (SUS) 304 clad steel. Under laying build up of hard surfacing.

Characteristics

MTENSILE is a lime titanium type electrode for all-position welding, depositing weld metal of 29%Cr - 9% Ni. As the weld metal contains large quantity of ferrite, its crack resistibility is good. It is used for weld-ing dissimilar metals and under laying welding of hard surfacing.

Notes on usage

1. Choose the welding current as low as possible to prevent cracking of plate.2. When the electrodes have absorbed moisture, dry them at 250-350°C for 60-90 minutes before

use.3. Weaving width should be within two and a half times of electrode's diameter.4. It is necessary to preheat the plate at 200°C and over in the case of welding of special steel such

as high alloy tool steels.




STANDARDSAWS E 312 - 16KS D 312 - 16

C Mn Si P S Cr Ni0.09 1.55 0.38 0.023 0.007 29.10 9.50

TSN/mm2 (kgf/mm2)

EL%

760(77) 28

Dia. (mm) 3.2 4.0L(mm) 350 350

ORDER No. 332557 332578Amp. F 70 - 105 95 - 145

V&OH 65 - 110 85 – 135

288


MIMPACTFor corrosion and high temperature abrasion

Applications

Hard surfacing of sleeves of high pressure pump, cutting knives, liners, valve seats and discs.

Characteristics

MIMPACT is Co-Cr-W alloy type covered electrode. Corrosion, heat and wearing resistibility of theweld metal are superb. Its toughness is rather good and it is resistible to impact at elevated temper-atures and room temperature. The hardness of weld metal is about Hv420 at RT.

Notes on usage

1. Dry the electrodes at 200°C for 30-60 minutes before use.2. Preheat the base metal at 150-350°C to reduce a crack tendency and cool slowly.


Typical mechanical properties of weld metal (Hv)


STANDARDSAWS E EcoCrAJIS D DCoCrA

Product Name C Mn Si Cr W CoMIMPACT 0.86 0.98 0.55 30.36 4.50 Bal

HIGH TEMPERATUREProduct Name RT 300OC 500OC 700OC

MIMPACT 420 375 340 290

Dia. (mm) 3.2 4.0L(mm) 350 350

ORDER No. 332579 332580Amp. F 80 - 110 110 - 170

MWEARMAXFor welding of dissimilar steelsand for surfacing purposes

ApplicationsMWEARMAX features high resistance to cracking and is therefore indicated for difficult to weldsteels and depositing stress-relaxing buffer layers on crack sensitive base metal or beneath hard fac-ing deposits.The highest operating temperature of dissimilar steel joints is + 300°C.Weld metal will work harden.

CharacteristicsThe weld metal consists of austenitic Cr-Ni-Mn steel with possible small amounts of delta-ferrite; itis non-scaling up to + 850°C.

Materials of applicationIt is applied to dissimilar steels (unalloyed to austenitic steels), to difficult to weld steels (e.g. heattreatable and tool steels) and to high manganese steels.



Welding Positions


REBAKING: Required, 2 hours at 300°C - 350°C. • MARICHEM MARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES reserves the right to modify its products and their packing without priornotice. • The information contained herein is designed to help the user in his choice of product. • The user should check that the cho-sen product is suited to the application he envisages for it. • All above-mentioned data are indicative

289MARIGASES®



Product Name C Mn Si Cr Ni MWEARMAX 0.11 6.4 0.6 18.5 9.5

Tensile Strength (N/mm 2) 0.2% Proof Strength (N/mm 2) Elongation A 5 (%) Impact Energy (J) ISO -V 650 400 > 35 +200C/100 -600C/60

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. 333123 2.5 300 65 - 70 333124 3.25 300 95 - 120

MWEARMAX

333125 4.0 340 110 - 160

= +

STANDARDSAWS SFA-5.4 E 307 - 15 DIN 8556 E 18 8 Mn B 20 + EN 1600 E 18 8 Mn B 42

MALBRONZEFor welding of copper alloys

Applications

MALBRONZE is recommended for the surfacing of mild steel, low alloyed steel and on copperalloys in order to combat impairments resulting from corrosion, cavitation, friction and erosion.

Characteristics

MALBRONZE electrodes' high tensile and good elongation secures resistance to cracking on pos-sible violent cooling after welding.

Materials of applicationIt is widely applied in rails, crane rollers, axle's repairs as well as in the functional surfacing ofmachines' weird parts which are of medium hardness.


Welding positions



290


Product Name Al Fe Mn Ni Cu MALBRONZE 7.0 2.50 13.50 2.20 Balance

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. MALBRONZE 344 332554 3.25 450 95-120

= - ~

STANDARDSAWS E Cu Mn Ni Al

MALUMINUMFor welding Aluminum

Applications

MALUMINUM is recommended for joining and building up aluminum and cast aluminum alloyswith silicon content up to 12%. It can also be applied for welding dissimilar aluminum alloys.

Characteristics

It is an electrode with special covering for welding aluminum-silicon forged and cast alloys. It is alsoapplicable as a surfacing electrode. It offers good weldability and has no porosity.

Materials of applicationIt is widely applied in aluminum-silicon cast alloys with silicon content up to 12%, such as G-AlSi12, G-AlSi 12 (Cu), G-AlSi 10 Mg, G-AlSi 10 Mg (Cu) and G-AlSi 6 Cu 4.


Typical mechanical properties of weld metal: (Single values are typical values)

Welding positions


IMPORTANT NOTICE: Redrying is required for 2 hours at 110°C - 120°C.

• MARICHEM MARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES reserves the right to modify its products and their packing without priornotice. • The information contained herein is designed to help the user in his choice of product. • The user should check that the cho-sen product is suited to the application he envisages for it. • All above-mentioned data are indicative only.

291MARIGASES®



Product Name Si Mn Al MALUMINUM 12 0.2 Balance


0.2 % Proof stress (N/mm2)

Elongation A 5 (%)

180 80 5

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. MALUMINUM 332555 3.25 350 80-110

= +

STANDARDSDIN 1732 EL-AlSi 12

MTINBROFor assembly and surfacing welds on copper alloys

Applications

MTINBRO is a basic electrode for the rebuilding of bearing seats, joining of phosphor-bronze alloysand for the welding of other copper alloys. Also, it can be for overlaying on wrought and cast steels.

Characteristics

It is suitable for depositing a bronze layer on steel, cast steel and cast iron. Particularly recommendedfor surfacing welds on bronze bearings in machine-building. Offers a smooth running.

Materials of applicationIt is applied in assembly and surfacing welds on tin-bronze materials, red brass and copper as weldas for depositing a bronze layer on steel, cast steel and cast iron.


Typical mechanical properties of weld metal: (Single values are typical values)

Welding positions


REBAKING: Generally not required, but if necessary please rebake for 2 hours at 300°C.

• MARICHEM MARIGASES WORLDWIDE SERVICES reserves the right to modify its products and their packing without priornotice. • The information contained herein is designed to help the user in his choice of product. • The user should check that the cho-sen product is suited to the application he envisages for it. • All above-mentioned data are indicative only.

292


Product Name Cu Sn Mn P MTINBRO 91 7.5 0.4 0.3


Hardness (HV 30)

300-350 70-100

PRODUCT NAME ORDER No Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Amp. MTINBRO 341 332556 3.25 350 70 -120

= +

STANDARDSAWS SFA-5.6 E Cu Sn - ADIN 1733 E Cu Sn 6

MARICHEM®

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................. 295

INTERNATIONAL NETWORK ....................................................................... 295

RANGE OF SERVICES .................................................................................... 296

THE CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM ............................. 296

CARBON DIOXIDE AS EXTINGUISHING AGENT ............................................... 296

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION .................................................................... 297

Arbitrary Inspection .............................................................................................. 297

Half yearly Inspection .......................................................................................... 297

Yearly Inspection ................................................................................................. 297

Two year Inspection ............................................................................................. 297

Record Inspection ................................................................................................ 297

COMPONENT OF THE SYSTEM ......................................................................... 297

Carbon dioxide gas cylinder ................................................................................ 298

Cylinder valve and releaser ................................................................................. 298

Group release mechanism .................................................................................. 299

Selection release mechanism .............................................................................. 299

The selection valve ............................................................................................... 299

The selection valve box ........................................................................................ 299

The discharge nozzle ............................................................................................ 299

THE PORTABLE AND WHEELED FIRE EXTINGUISHER ...................... 300

CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHERS ................................................................. 301

DRY POWDER EXTINGUISHERS ........................................................................ 301

FOAM EXTINGUISHERS ...................................................................................... 301

Protein foam - Regular ......................................................................................... 301

Fluoroprotein foam concentrates Plus - F & FP .................................................. 301

Alcohol resistant Aqueous film forming foam concentrate ................................. 301

LIFE SAVING EQUIPMENT ....................................................................... 302

BENEFITS ......................................................................................................... 304

FIRE, RESCUE AND SAFETY SERVICES

T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S

MARICHEM MARIGASES TERMS AND CONDITIONS

OF SALE OF GOODS AND SUPPLY OF CYLINDERS ........................... 305

PRODUCT INDEX ............................................................................................ 307

MARICHEM®


MARICHEM® 295


®MMMM FIRE, RESCUE AND SAFETY SERVICES

MARICHEM WORLDWIDEis your partner inFire, Rescue & Safety Services

INTRODUCTIONLong established in the Maritime Industry, wehave earned the trust of our customers by pro-viding top rank quality services for more than25 years. MARICHEM has expanded its rangeof services with the involvement in Fire,Rescue and Safety Services for over two yearsnow with the same extent of achievement.

INTERNATIONAL NETWORKMARICHEM has achieved to implement awell-established network in order to provide

the most professional service and help modernshipping meet today's safety standards.Ourstrength relies on partnership and co-operationwith Safety Inspectors and qualified techniciansbacked with many years of experience, andapproved by Classification Societies such as:

• ABS• Bureau Veritas• Det Norske Veritas• Germanischer Lloyd• Lloyd's Register• NKK• Polish Register• Registro Italiano Navale

Fire, Rescue & Safety Services can be provided in a worldwide basis

296


The Carbon Dioxide fire extinguishing system

RANGE OF SERVICES

The Carbon Dioxide (CO2) system is the most vital part of the vessel and can be assimilated to theheart of the latter as it will control all the parts that can be endangered.

Carbon dioxideas extinguishing agent

1. Carbon dioxide gas is stable and does not wield influence on oil, metal or electric insulator.

2. Since no pollution is caused at the fire fighting, the equipment, which is not damaged by the fire,can resume the operation immediately after the fire is put off.

3. As carbon dioxide has higher electric insulation property than air, it can be safely used to the elec-tric equipment.

4. Since it can penetrate to any gap, the fire is extinguished completely no matter what complicatedform the burning object may have.

5. The quality is not deteriorated if stored over a long period.

Since a large amount of oil is found in the engine room, boiler room, pump room, e.t.c. the fire maybe spread rapidly. In the case of the engine room, therefore, it is necessary that 85% of requiredamount of carbon dioxide is discharged within 2 minutes for the prompt fire extinguishments.

The fire extinguishing system in the room consists of discharge nozzles, the carbon dioxide gascylinders and the large type selection valve, the latter two being connected with the fixed piping forpressure use.

MARICHEM® 297



Maintenance and inspection

The daily maintenance and inspection work are quite important, if the performance of this unit,which is rarely used is to be exploited fully at the fire fighting time.

1. Arbitrary inspection

Visual inspection and checking for the deformation or damage of the tube, pipe, valve, electric wireor other accessories. These have to be kept in well-maintained status.

2. Half-yearly inspection

Inspection on the sounding of audible alarms such as sirens, bells, etc. Also checking and inspectionof the electric safety circuits like the emergency stop of the ventilating device.

3. Yearly inspection

Weighting of the carbon dioxide cylinder and inspection of the filled gas amount. If the filled amountis reduced by more than 10%, it has to be refilled.

4. Two year inspection

Blow-through the lines of carbon dioxide or compressed air to the respective pipe system andchecking for the pipe clogging, leakage or other abnormality.

5. Record after inspection

Records of the results must be kept in a record form, certificates.

298


COMPONENT OF THE SYSTEM

Carbon dioxide gas cylinder

The carbon dioxide gas cylinder for fire extin-guishments is equipped with the dip tube andthe cylinder valve for the rapid discharge. Thecylinder valve is connected to the check valveand gathering pipe by means of the connectingpipe. The cylinders usually have the net vo-lume of 68 litres, to which 45.4 kg of carbondioxide is filled.

Cylinder valve and releaser

1. Manual operation

Disengage the safety clip of the releaser andpush the knob for operation.

2. Automatic operation by gas pressure

Even if the safety clip remains, the automaticactivation can be made, when the gas pressuredrives the needle cutter.

3. Gas discharge

When the release disc is ruptured by the needlecutter, the gas in E chamber is purged into theair. Then, the piston retreats by the pressure ofD section, and the valve is instantaneously opento the full extent. The gas in the cylinder is dis-charged from A via B.

MARICHEM® 299



Group release mechanism

In case many carbon dioxide gas cylinders areto be discharged by manual operation at thesame time, the trigger is used. The trigger ismounted at the gathering pipe and is connectedto the cylinder discharge device via the controlcopper pipe.

Selection release mechanism

In order to use the carbon dioxide cylinder forfire extinguishment for the engine room andpump room in common, the selection valve isinstalled at each compartment. The selectionrelease mechanism consists of:

1. The selection valve

This is used for the rapid release of the carbondioxide gas to the room. When the actuating gasdrives the piston releaser, the lever is actuatedand the valve is opened. It is also possible toopen the lever directly by hand. After the use,push the valve spindle in, hang the spindlehanger on the pin and fix the lever at the orig-inal position.

2. The selection valve box

If the selection valve is to be opened by hand atthe fire in the room, first open the door of theselection valve box. The alarm switch interlockis arranged at the door, so that the alarm maysound without fail before the gas is released.

3. The discharge nozzle

300


The portable and wheeled fire extinguishers

There are four main types of classification and combinations for which specific kinds of fire extin-guishers can be used. The table below points out the proper agent to use for each case of fire:

Class of fire Type of hazard

Wat

er

Foam

AB

C D

ry

Che

mic

al

CO

2

Hal

on

A Ordinary Combustible Wood, Cloth, Paper

Rubbish Yes Yes Yes No No

B

Flammable Liquids and Grease, Gasoline, Oil, Paint, Grease, Natural

Gas, Manufactured Gas

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

C Electrical Equipment

Wiring, Controls, Panels, Motors

No No Yes Yes Yes

A + B

Combination of Ordinary Combustible and

Flammable Liquids and Gases

No No Yes No No

A + C Combination of ordinary

Combustible and Electrical Equipment

No No Yes No No

B & C

Combination of Flammable Liquids and

Gases and Electrical Equipment

No No Yes Yes Yes

A, B & C

Combination of Ordinary Combustible and

Flammable Liquids & Gases and Electrical

Equipment

No No Yes No No

MARICHEM® 301



Carbon dioxide extinguishersCarbon Dioxide extinguishers should be of black colour. CO2 is stored in these extinguishers as aliquid under pressure and is discharged onto the fire as an electrically non-conductive gas, whichextinguishes burning material by excluding oxygen.Moreover, CO2 is a clean, dry gas and a non-conductor of electricity. It leaves no residue and can beused on delicate electric equipment.

Dry powder extinguishersDry powder extinguishers should be of blue colour. BC powder is a foam compatible fire extin-guishing dry powder based on sodium bicarbonate with flow and moisture repellent additives.ABC powder is a fire extinguishing dry powder with a high ammonium phosphate content havingthe ability to form an oxygen excluding crust over hot surfaces.

Foam extinguishersFoam extinguishers should be of yellow colour. For inflammable liquid fires it is essential to choosethe foam concentrates suitable for the specific fire. The following foam concentrates are availablefor various fire types:

1. Fluoroprotein foam 3% Low expansion foam

2. AFFF (Aqueous Film Forming Foam) 3% or 6% Low expansion foam

3. Protein foam 3% or 6% Low expansion foam

4. Alcohol resistant fluoroprotein foam 6% Low expansion foam

5. Alcohol resistant AFFF foam 6% Low expansion foam

6. Synthetic foam 3% High expansion foam

Protein Foam Concentrate - Regular

Standard or "Regular" protein Foam can be applied on flammable liquids as well as on toxic non-flammable liquids to reduce vapor release

Fluoroprotein Foam Concentrates Plus - F & FP

The best form of protein based foam liquid combining rapid-fire knockdown with excellent burnback resistance. Stable and yet fluid foams, which quickly smother fires involving hydrocarbons,may be produced using low expansion equipment.

Alcohol Resistant Aqueous Film Forming Foam Concentrate

All-purpose AFFF is an alcohol resistant type foam liquid (AR) specially formulated to extinguishalcohol or polar solvent fuel fires in addition to fires involving hydrocarbon fuels.

302


INFLATABLE LIFERAFTS

A wide variety of models from different manu-facturers are available and their names areMitsubishi, Fujikura, Toyo, Sumitomo, R.F.D.,Beaufort, Berwyn, Dunlop, Elliot, BFGoodrich, Viking, Ballon-fabrik etc.

They are all conform to SOLAS regulations of1960, 1974 and 1981 and appropriate govern-ment regulations and are furnished with stan-dard equipment if customer requirementsspecify, such as hydrostatic release, etc.

All these products are fully supportedthroughout the world with a comprehensivenetwork of distributors and Approved ServicingAgents.

One of the above common models is, forexample, described below in details just for ref-erence.

CONSTRUCTION

The buoyancy chambers are manufactured frompolyurethane proofed nylon fabric.They are superimposed and independent air-tight compartments. The boarding step is so designed that the buoy-ancy chamber will not deflate should it becomedamaged. The canopy is double skinned forinsulation. The outer surface is orange for high visibility,the inner is blue for the comfort of the occu-pants. Retro-reflective tape together with a rainattachment strip are fitted on the outside.At the top there is a dry cell automatic sea lightmeeting the 2-mile visibility and exceeding the12-hour duration requirement. It has a switchwhich enables it to be turned off during the day.The doorway closure ensures a completelyweather tight seal with simplicity of operation.

The floor can beinflated by the sur-vivors for insulationagainst the cold.Stability for the raftis provided by highvolume, weightedwater pockets on theunderside of the floorand by the anti-tangle conicaldrogue.A ladder across the

underside of the floorassists in righting theraft, should inverteddeployment occurdue to extreme con-ditions.

Life saving equipment

STANDARD EQUIPMENT

• External and internal automatic dry cell

• Sea light unit

• Rain catchment

• Retro-reflective tape

• Scale A or B emergency pack (inside)

• Rescue line & quoit (inside)

• Safety knife (inside)

• Paddles (inside)

• Topping up pump (inside)

• Leak stoppers (inside)

• Torch (inside)

• Signal code card (inside)

• Repair kit (inside)

• Immediate action card (inside)

• Bailer (inside)

• Drogue

• Boarding step/rungs

• Towing point

• External and internal life lines

• Righting ladder (underneath)

• Water pockets

Further Equipment toCustomer Requirement

• Hydrostatic release

• Deck Cradle

• Radar Reflector

• Smoke Floats

• Survival Bags

INFLATION

The buoyancy chambers, boarding step andcanopy support are inflated by a stored gassystem. Excess pressure discharge on initialinflation or due to high temperature is to theatmosphere via pressure relief valves.


303


®MMMM

MARICHEM®


304

Inspection, Service

And Certification of Various

Brands of Life Rafts

Upon request, we can supply new or secondhand life raft, any equipment such as lifeboat,man overboard, safety signs, immersion suit,thermal protective aid, life jacket, life jacketlights, life buoys, fire hose, fireman's equip-ment.

BENEFITS

MARICHEM secures a worldwide availabilityfor annual inspections by classificationapproved service suppliers at the most compet-itive prices of the market.

In addition, we propose a free of charge con-stant follow-up of your entire fleet's certificatesand recommend the most advantageous port ofassistance.

•For further information or details about our

services and products, feel free to send us your

inquiry at our headquarters. We will be glad to

submit our full quotation for any required

inspection.

w w w . m a r i c h e m - m a r i g a s e s . c o m

MARICHEM MARIGASES TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE OF GOODS AND SUPPLY OF CYLINDERS

1. All MARICHEM MARIGASES terms and conditions are valid for all sales of goods (including the supply of gas cylin-ders) from MARICHEM MARIGASES LTD and their authorized distributors, agents or representatives (hereinafter calledMARICHEM MARIGASES).

2. By ordering or accepting delivery of goods supplied by MARICHEM MARIGASES, it is constituted that the customerhas accepted the MARICHEM MARIGASES terms and conditions and expressed exclusion of the customer's condi-tions of purchase. In case that an order is placed by a customer for and on behalf of a vessel, her master, her owners,the contract of sale is deemed to be concluded with all the above parties. In case that an order is placed by a cus-tomer as agent for a principal, disclosed or not, such customer is liable jointly and severely with such principal forpayment of all amounts due and the performance of all obligations under these conditions.

3. The purchase price for the goods specified according to MARICHEM MARIGASES worldwide price list, which is inforce at the time and place of delivery. For all deliveries, the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC) - Incoterms2000 or its later modifications published and any specific product delivery conditions stated on the MARICHEM MARI-GASES quotation or order confirmation, shall apply to all purchases/deliveries made hereunder.

4. The customer must pay the value of the invoices issued by MARICHEM MARIGASES within the agreed with eachcustomer credit period, which is also mentioned on each of its invoices, otherwise MARICHEM MARIGASES shall claimlegal interest on any overdue payment.

5. When MARICHEM MARIGASES has received full payment for the purchased goods their title passes to the cus-tomer. If MARICHEM MARIGASES has not received payment within the agreed with the customer credit period fromthe date of invoice, MARICHEM MARIGASES has the right to retake possession of the goods and the gas cylinderswithout any court order or other process of law. MARICHEM MARIGASES hereby is granted by the customer the per-mission to enter on to board its vessel, or its premises and retake possession of such goods or cylinders. The cus-tomer is obliged to assist MARICHEM MARIGASES in retaking possession. MARICHEM MARIGASES will also claimand recover all costs and expenses incurred for this procedure.

6. MARICHEM MARIGASES retains the ownership to the gas cylinders while they are in the customer's possession.The customer may transfer the title of the gas cylinders to any third party after the payment of the deposit and theremoval of MARICHEM MARIGASES trade name from the cylinders. In this case the customer has no claim for depositrefund from MARICHEM MARIGASES.

7. For the gas cylinders, initially the customer shall pay a deposit according to the MARICHEM MARIGASES worldwideprice list, which will be refunded if the cylinder is returned. In addition to the above, returned cylinders should be in agood condition and for safety reasons will be always considered as empty. MARICHEM MARIGASES credits thedeposit of the returned gas cylinders only in case that they have been purchased by MARICHEM MARIGASES. For thegas cylinders, which are not purchased from MARICHEM MARIGASES, the customer shall reach an agreement withMARICHEM MARIGASES so as to confirm its acceptance for the collection as well as the price of the gas cylinders.All refunds will be in a form of a credit note only.

8. MARICHEM MARIGASES cylinders can be returned to any of the company's stock points. MARICHEM MARIGASESaccepts to collect cylinders only if they are MARICHEM MARIGASES or of the same standards and connections:

OXYGEN BS5045 and DOT 3AA

ACETYLENE BS5045 and BS 6061

REFRIGERANT DOT/1CC 4B/4BA/4BW 300/400

MARICHEM MARIGASES does not accept to deliver or collect cylinders of any other type.

9. If it has been confirmed that the cylinders, which have been purchased from MARICHEM MARIGASES, and are notrefilled in MARICHEM MARIGASES stock points or have not been refilled for 120 days from the date of purchase inone of MARICHEM MARIGASES stock points, MARICHEM MARIGASES reserves the right to refuse collecting the cylin-ders by crediting the deposit. In this case, the amount of the credit will be depending on the date of purchase.

10. In the event of lack of agreed qualities (conformity) of the goods at the time of delivery, the customer must notifyMARIGASES within 10 days after the delivery. Only in case this lack is not due to the customer or circumstances onhis part, MARICHEM MARIGASES shall at its sole discretion rectify the lack of conformity or deliver substitute goods.

11. MARICHEM MARIGASES is not liable for loss or damage resulting from delayed delivery of goods or gas cylinders,which is due to force majeure, or other events beyond the reasonable control of MARICHEM MARIGASES or could notbe reasonably foreseen by MARICHEM MARIGASES when the order was placed.

12. The customer shall comply with all instructions, warnings and safety norms provided by MARICHEM MARIGASESand shall conform with industry practice in relation to storage, handling and use of the goods and gas cylinders.MARICHEM MARIGASES is not to be considered liable for damages or losses resulting from failure of the customer tokeep up with all the above-mentioned instructions or for damages or losses resulting from accidental causes.MARICHEM MARIGASES is in no event liable for incidental, indirect or consequential damages or losses, includingdamages for loss of profit resulting from the failure of, uncontrolled release of gas or explosion of gas cylinder, whichcauses bodily injury, death, or damage to property.

PRODUCT INDEX

307


®MMMM

PRODUCT INDEX

PRODUCT INDEX

308

PRODUCT INDEX

PRODUCT INDEX

309


®MMMM

PRODUCT INDEX

PRODUCT INDEX

310

PRODUCT INDEX

PRODUCT INDEX

311


®MMMM

PRODUCT INDEX

PRODUCT INDEX

312

PRODUCT INDEX

PRODUCT INDEX

313


®MMMM

PRODUCT INDEX

Date post:	14-Feb-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	trannhi
View:	348 times
Download:	12 times

M A R I C H E M - · PDF fileM A R I C H E M ® P R O D U C T S ... MARICHEM PCS Cargo...

Documents